Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (247 trang)

test 4th English 8 9 co dap an hot

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.21 MB, 247 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>THE FIRST TEMR</b>



<b>WEEK 1 ( 1+2+3)</b>


<b>Period 1: </b>

<b>Consolidation</b>


<b> Preparing Date : 19/08/2011</b>


Teaching Date : .../08/2011


<b>a. Objectives: </b>


*.Teaching points :Students will be able to remind something about grade 7 and know how to
learn well in the new school year.


<b>b. Language contents:</b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: - Present simple tense
- Present progressive tense


- Adj : Compareative & superative


<b>c.Teaching aids :</b>Textbooks , chalks , boards ,posters.
<b>d. Procedures:</b>

<b> </b>

<b> </b>


<b>* Organizations(2’) – Greeting and checking attendance .</b>


<b>* Checking up (7’) –Rewrite some main grammar structures in grade 7 on the board . </b>
- T asks some Ss to go to the board and rewrite .



- T corrects and give marks .
<b>* New lesson : </b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Student’s </sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>
I. Revision :


<b>The tenses : </b>
<i>- Present simple: </i>


<b>S + V( s/es)/ To be (am/ is /are)</b>
<i>- Present progressive <b>:</b></i>


<b> S + To Be + V_ ing +….</b>
<i>- Simple future <b>: </b></i>


<b>S + Will/ Shall …</b>
<i>- Near future : </i>
<b>To Be going to….</b>
<i>- Past simple:</i>


<b> S + V( ed/ qkbqt)/To Be( was/ were)....</b>


*Teacher hang a poster, give some forms and uses .
=> Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of each tense
Exercise : Change these sentences into other tenses
( Present simple , Present progressive , near future ,
Simple future and Past simple ) and add appropriate
adverbs of time .


-Give some forms and uses



-Listen and repeat the uses and
forms of them


-Copy down


-Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

1. She is in Grade 7 => ……….
2. They are playing soccer =>………
3. She went to Ha Noi last week =>……….
4. I will visit my sister next week =.>………
5. Mai is going to build a new house .=>………
- Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback


<b>II. Presenting the English Grade 8 </b>


- There are 16 units in this program , each unit has 6
parts Which mention a particular skill such as Listening,
Speaking , Reading and Writing


+ At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting started “ to
lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up .


-Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to
summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in each
one .



Introduce some books , reference books to students
<b>III. Preparation : </b>


- Ask Ss to prepare Unit 1 “ Getting started + Listen and
read “


<b>IV. Consolidation :- Retell the main contents of this </b>
lesson.


<b>V. Homework : </b>


-Learn by heart these old forms .
- Redo all exercises in work books.
- Prepare for next lesson.


these sentences into other tenses .


- Some pairs to demonstrate in front
of class.


Listen to the introduction
Work individually


Listen and copy .


-Copy down homeworks.


<b>E. </b>



<b> EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 2: Unit 1: My friends</b>



<b> Lesson 1 : Getting started + LISTEN AND READ</b>


<i>Preparing Date : 19/08/2011</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>a. Objectives: </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Hoa LAN _ Nine and read the </b>
dialogue for details and review simple present and simple past tenses .


<b>b. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:


- Some of active words
2. Grammar


- Asking about people’s appearance
- Exclamations


- Enough with adj


<b>C. Teaching aids</b> : Text books , cards , cassette , chalk ,poster.


<b>D. Procedures: </b>


<b>* Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance </b>


<b>*Checking up (7’)- Asks Ss to retell 2 tenses to learned in grade 7.</b>
- T corrects and give marks .


<b>*. New lesson :</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


I. Warm up : Pelmanism


meet come live think send thought
receive met lived received came sent
- Remark and lead in new lesson .


II. Presentation :
1. Pre- reading


a) Pre- teach vocabulary : Introduce the aims and some
new words


- to seem ( translation )


- a next door neighbor : a person who lives next to your
house


- to look like ( translation )



* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
b) Pre- questions


- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in pairs
to answer them


1. Is Nien Lan'<sub>s friend or Hoa</sub>'<sub>s friend ?</sub>


2. How old is Nien ?
3. Where does Nien live ?
4. Is she a beautiful girl ?
- Give feedback


2. While – reading :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
dialogue between Hoa , Lan and Nien . Then check if
their answers are correct or not


<i>*Answers: 1-She is Hoa</i>,<sub>s friend . </sub>


- Work in groups


- Listen and write down .


- Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually


- Guess its meanings
- Copy down



- Play game in whole class.
- Work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

2- She is 12 years old ./3- She lives in Hue .
4- Yes , she is .


3. Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and answer the
questions in exercise 2 / page 11


- Have them work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class and
correct their mistakes or pronunciation .


- Correct and give feedback :
a) She lives in Hue


b) No , she does not .


c) The sentence is “ She was not old enough to be in my
class. “


d) At Christmas


- Ask them to work in open pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions and the dialogue . Gap filling :
Language focus 1



- Ask Ss to use the present simple and simple past tense
to complete the paragraph , using some verbs : live –
send – be – come


Hoa ... in Hue last year , but now she ....in Ha Noi .
<i>Yesterday , Hoa ,<sub>s friend Nien ... Hoa a letter . </sub></i>


<i>Nien ... Hoa,<sub> neighbor when Hoa lived in Hue . She ...</sub></i>


<i>younger than Hoa . She ... to Ha Noi in December . </i>
- Get Ss to work individually and then compare their
answers with their partners .


- Give feedback


lived – lives – sent – was – is - comes .
- Asks Ss do exercise 1(16)


- Call on some Ss to read the completed paragraph in
front of class .


<b>III. Post - reading : Writing </b>


- Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan .
- Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the simple
present or past tense to write individually .


* Cues :


<i>a. Lan / Hoa,<sub>s best friend </sub></i>



<i>b. They / same class / Quang Trung School .</i>
<i>c. Last year / Hoa / to school first time .</i>


<i>d. Lan / show / round / introduce / to new friends .</i>
- Let Ss discuss with their partners .


- Choose some answers and correct them in front of the
class .


<b>IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this </b>


- Repeat all the correct answers and
copy down


- Work in pairs


- Demonstrate in front of class.


- Practice asking and answering the
questions and the dialogue .


- Complete the paragraph
individually .


- Read the complete paragraph
aloud


- Write a paragraph about Hoa , Lan



- Work in groups.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

lesson.


<b>V Homework: </b>


1. Rewrite all the answers and complete paragraph on
their notebooks ./ Do Exercise in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


- Listen and copy


<b>E. </b>


<b> EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 3: Unit 1: My friends</b>


<b>Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>


<i>Preparing Date : 19/08/2011</i>


<i>Teaching Date : .../08/2011</i>


<b>a. Objectives: </b>



- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to describe someone .
- Develop Ss’ speaking skill.


<b>b. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary : Some of descripting words
2. Grammar :


- How to describe some one


- The way introducing some body and rebling when being introduced
<b>c. Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , pictures , chalks, lesson plan ., radio, CD. poster.


<b>d. procedures: </b>


<b>* Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance </b>


<b>* Checking up (7’) – Asks some ss to go to the board to describe about their friends</b>
- T corrects and give marks .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 6 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>


<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>


<b>Warm up :* </b><i><b>Brainstorming</b></i><b> :</b>


- Ask Ss to think of the adjectives used to describe
body build and hair .



* Possible answers :


- fat - straight
- slim - long
- tall


- short - color : black / dark
- overweight blond / fair
- slender brown/grey
<b>Presentation :</b>


- Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask them to
describe her hair , her body build .


Ex : She has long blond hair
She is short and thin


<b>Form S + have / has + adjective + hair</b>
<b>S + be + adjectives</b>


<b>Practice :</b>
Word cue drill


- Prepare 6 cards so that students can drill easily .
a. He / tall / thin


b. She / short / slim
c. He / short / fat
d. Long / black


e. Curly / blond
f. Straight / brown


- Ask Ss to read their complete sentences aloud
- Correct and give feedback


a. He is tall and thin .
b. She is short and slim .
c. He is short and fat .
d. She has long black hair .
e. She has curly blond hair .
f. She has straight brown hair .
Practice speaking


- Ask Ss to look at six people in their books .
- Call on a student to describe one person , the
others have to guess who he / she is


* Example :


S1 : This person is short and thin . She has long
blond hair .


- Ss work in groups of 5
- Work in group


- Read all the adjectives aloud .
- Look at the picture and read the
example aloud



- Copy and give some examples .


- Work individually


- Read the sentences aloud .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

<b>E. </b>


<b> EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 4: Unit 1: My friends</b>


<b>Lesson 3 : read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 3/09/2011</i>


<b>I. objectives: </b>


<b>*Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Ba</b>'<sub>s friends. </sub>


- Develop Ss’ reading skill.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary :



- Character, orphanage, reserved, sociable , tell jorks, sense of humor
2. Grammar :


- Present simple tense


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , board, lesson plan ,posters.</b>
<b>IV Procedures: </b>


<b>*Organization : Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>*Checking up :- In the new lesson and give them marks.</b>
<b>*New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b> Students' activities</b>
<b>Warm up : * Chatting </b>


Ask Ss to look at four pictures at page 10 and talk
about the activities they want to do after school or
in their free time and ask some questions :


1.What are these students doing ?


(play soccer / play chess /read books /play


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

volleyball )


2. What time of the day do you think it is ?
( in the morning / evening , after school )
3. Do you like soccer / reading books ...?
4. Whom do you like playing with ?



- Correct mistakes if any and lead in the new
lesson .


<b>Pre - reading : Introduce the aims and some new </b>
words to students


Pre- teach( vocabulary) :
- a character ( translation )


- an orphanage : a place where children without
parents live


- reserved (adj)
- sociable (adj)


- to tell jokes = to tell a story which makes people
laugh


- (a) sense of humor ( translation )


* Checking vocabulary : What and where
- Write the word on the board , put one word in
each circle


<i>T/F statements predictions </i>


- Stick the poster of T / F statements are about Ba
and his friends , read them and guess which
statements are true , which are false :



a. Ba only has three friends – Bao , Song , Khai .
b. Ba and his friends have the same characters .
c. Bao – Song – Khai are quite reserved in public .
d. They all enjoy school and study hard .


- Get Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .


<b>While - reading </b>


- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text
carefully and check their predictions :


- Give feedback a. F b. F c. F d. T
- Ask Ss to correct the false statements
* Correction:


a. Ba has a lot of friends , but he spends most of
his time with Bao , Song . Khai .


b. They have different characters .


c. Only Song and Khai are quite reserved .
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud
* Choose the best answer and write :


Listen carefully
Listen and repeat



Guess its meanings and copy


Play games


Work in pairs to predict
Read their predictions


Read the text and check their
predictions


Correct the false statements and
copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

- Explain the meanings of the phrases :


+ does not affect his school work : không ảnh
h-ởng tới việc học


+ rather shy : hơi nhút nhát
+ get tired of : nhàm chán


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to choose the best
answers .


- Call on some pairs to report their answers
- Listen and correct . Then give feed back


a. A b. C c . B d. D
* Now answer the questions :



- Let Ss read the text again and work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs of students to ask and answer
the questions


- Correct and give feedback


a. He feels lucky having a lot of friends .
b. Bao is the most sociable


c. Khai likes reading


d. His jokes sometimes annoy his friends .


e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work
at local orphanage .


- Let Ss practice asking and answering the
questions in open pairs .


* Post - reading :


- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk to one another
about their friends , using the adjectives they have
just learnt to describe .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class.
<b>Consolidation : -Retell the main points of this </b>
lesson.



<b>Homework : 1. Write a paragraph about one close</b>
friend ( about 50 words )


2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs to do the exercise
Read their answers aloud


Copy down


-Practice asking and answering
the questions


Copy the right answers


Work in groups to talk about their
friends


Demonstrate in front of class.
Listen and copy


<b>E. </b>


<b> EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>Period 5: Unit 1: My friends</b>


<b>Lesson 4 : write</b>




<i>Preparing Date : 3/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


*. Teaching points:-By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a paragraph about their
close friends.


- Develop Ss’ writing skill.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: humourous, elder
2. Structure : Simple present tense


<b>III. Teaching aids : </b>- Lesson plan , poster, textbooks, cues.
<b>IV. Proceduce : </b>


*. Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance .


* Checking up : Ask Ss to answer the questions about Bao’s friends .
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


* New lesson :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students' activities</sub></b>


Warm up
** Slap the board



<i>( Using the words they have learnt in the previous </i>
<i>lesson ) </i>


Pre - writing :
<i>* Reading :</i>


- Ask Ss to read the information about Tam , then
answer some questions .


a. What is his name ?
b. How old is he ?


c. What does he look like ?
d. What is he like ?


e. Where does he live ?
f. Whom does he live with ?
g. Who is his friend ?


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .


- Correct and give feedback .
a. Le Van Tam


b. He is 14


c. he is tall and thin . He has short black hair .
d. He is sociable , humorous and helpful
e. He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street , Ha Noi .



f . He lives with his mother and an elder brother .
g . Ba and Bao


Play games


Read the information about Tam .


Practice asking and answering the
questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

While - writing :


- Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam , using the
information they have just got .


- Work individually . Then compare with the
paragraph in their books .


- Ask Ss to write some information about one of
their friends , then write a paragraph about her /
him .


- Get Ss to share with their partners and correct if
possible .


* Sample :


His / her name ... . He / she is ...
<i>years old . He / she ...lives at ... in ... </i>


<i>with ... He / she is ... . He / she </i>


<i>has ...hair . He / she is ...helpful .</i>
<i>He / she has ... friends , but his / her </i>
<i>close friends are ... and ... . </i>


- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
Post - writing :


- Ask Ss to write a similar paragraph about himself
/ her self


- Go around the class and help Ss , then ask some
Ss to speak in front of class a bout himself /
herself.


<b>Consolidation : </b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson .
<b> Homework :</b>


1. Write a paragraph about one of their family
members .


2. Learn by heart vocabulary and main points .
3 . Prepare the next lesson .


individually


Read their writings aloud .



Write another paragraph , using the
sample .


Demonstrate in front of class.
Write about himself / herself .


Listen and copy .


- Listen and copy down.


<b>E. </b>


<b> EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<i>Preparing Date : 4/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>*Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to review the simple present tense to</b>
talk about general truths and write some sentences , using the structure “ (not) + adjectives enough
+ to infinitive .


<b>II. Language contents</b>: <b> </b>



1. Vocabulary:


- Some active words
2. Grammar:


- Simple tense


- Present simple to talk about general truths
- Not adj + enough + to -inf


III. <b> Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , chalks , boards , posters ..
<b>IV. Procedures : </b>


<b>* Organizations : Greeting and checking attendance .</b>


<b>* Checking up : check in the new lesson and give them marks .</b>
<b>* New lesson :</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students' activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Kim<b>,<sub>s game </sub></b>


( Using language focus 3 )


- Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 17 quickly .
Then let them keep their books closed .


- Divide the class into four groups .


- Give Ss two questions , the group which answers


correctly the fastest wins the game .


<i>* Questions: </i>


a. How many people are there in the picture ?
( Four )


b. What is each person wearing ?


- The Woman is wearing a red shirt and a green
dress.


- The man who is standing beside the car is
wearing brown trousers and a yellow shirt .
- The man who is standing on the pavement is
wearing a pink shirt and blue trousers .


- The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt .
<b>Presentation :</b>


Grammar :


a. Present simple : S + V(es/s)….
eg: I go on holiday twice a year.


* Present simple to talk about general truths - It is
used to express an action which is always true .


- Play game in two teams
Ss answer the T’s questions



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

b. Past simple :


S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + ….
eg:I missed the train this morning .


c. (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive
Eg: He is old enough to see that film .


She is not clever enough to do this thing .
<b>Exercises: </b>


<i><b>Ex 1</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i> Complete the paragraphs . Use the correct
form of the verbs in brackets


- Ask Ss to work individually and then compare
their answers with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback


a. 1- lives 2- sent 3- was 4- is


b. 1- are 2- came 3- showed 4- introduced
<i>Ex 2 : Complete the dialogue .</i>


- Explain some new words :


+ a planet : the sun , the moon , the earth ...
+ Mars / Mercury ( translation )



+ silly ( adj) ( translation )


- Ask them to read the words in the box .


- Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and
Tuan , his young cousin .


- Call on some pairs to practice the complete
dialogue .


- Correct their pronunciation and give feedback .
* keys :


1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- is
<i>Ex 4 : Set the scene to introduce the aims of the </i>
exercise :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to read the complete dialogue
- Correct and give feedback


a. not big enough
b. not old enough
c. strong enough
d. good enough
<b>Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main contents of this lesson .


Homework :


1. Ask Ss to write five sentences about
themselves , using the structure : (not) +


Read the example and give some
more .


Work individually


Read their answers aloud .
Copy down


Listen and copy


Read the words in the box and
complete the dialogue .


Practice the dialogue
Copy down


-complete the dialogue
Listen carefully .
Work in pairs


Practice the dialogues
-work in pairs .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

adjective enough + to – infinitive .
2. Prepare the next lesson.



<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


WEEK 3


<b>Period 7: Unit 2: making arrangements</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

<i>Preparing Date : 09/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>*. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the telephone to make and </b>
confirm arrangements .


- Develop Ss’speaking and listening skills .


<b>II</b>


<b> . Language contents : </b>


1. Vocabulary:


- Some words of the media
2. Grammar:



- Going to
- Adv of place


<b>III. Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks, poster , pictures , radio , CD, lesson plan.
<b>IV. Procedure : </b>


<b>* Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>* Checking up: </b>


- Asks Ss to describe the picture , talk about some person in that .


eg :The man is standing next to the car , He is wearing yellow shirt . He is tall and fat .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 16 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Warm up : Matching ( Getting started )</b>


- Ask Ss to match each object with its name
* Answers :


a. an answering machine
b. a mobile phone


c. a fax machine


d. a telephone directory
e. a public telephone


f. an address book


- Give the definitions of these objects on a poster
and ask Ss to match the object with its definition .
* Definition :


1. to send fax


2. to find someone ,<sub>s telephone number </sub>


3. to write address and telephone numbers
4. to make a phone call in street telephone box .
5. to leave and take messages


6. to make phone call anywhere you like
* Answers : a-5 b-6 c-1 d-2 e- 4 f-3
<b>Pre-teach :</b>


* Elicits and present some words :
- (to) hold on :


-(to) bit far / alittle bit far :
-(an) arrangement :


- ( to ) agree :
Pre- reading :
Open prediction :


- Set the scene “ Hoa and Nga are talking on the
phone . They are talking about going to see a


movie “


- Ask Ss to guess :
a. Who made the call ?
b. Who introduced herself ?


c. Who invented the other to the movies ?
d. Who arranged a meeting place ?


e. Who arranged the time ?
f. Who agreed to the time ?


- Have them work in pairs to guess the answers .
- Call on some pairs to report the answers and
write them on the board .


While – reading :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
conversation between Nga and Hoa , then give
them feedback .


* Answers :


a. Nga made the call
b. Nga introduced herself .


- Work in groups of 4 (table )
- Match each object with its name
- Give answer keys



Listen and copy down
- Works individually.


-Copy down new words .
- Repeat in chorus


-Listen to teacher sets the scene .
-Ss guess and answer the


questions .
- Work in pairs.


Work in pairs


Read their predictions


Listen to the tape , read the
conversation to check their
predictions


Practice asking and answering the
questions


- Work in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...


...
...


<b>Period 8: Unit 2: making arrangements</b>


<b> Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 10/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


* <i><b>Teaching points</b></i><b> : </b>


<b> - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk on the phone about intentions with “ Going </b>
<b>To” </b>


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar


- Could I talk to …….?


- Review : Would you like to ……/


<b>III. Teaching aids</b><i><b> :</b></i><b> </b> Textbooks , cards , chalks , .lesson plan , posters.
<b>IV. Procedures : </b>


<b>* </b><i><b>Organization</b></i><b>s : - Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>* </b><i><b>Checking up </b></i><b>: -T asks some questions : </b>



1. Have you got a telephone ?


2. Do you have a telephone at your home ?
3. What is your telephone mumber?


- T corrects and give them marks .
<b>-</b><i><b> New lesson</b></i><b> : </b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Student’s </sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Chatting


- Talk to Ss to about using telephone .
1. Do you have a telephone at home ?
2. How often do you make a phone call ?


3. What would you say when you pick up the phone
to answer it ?


4. What would you say if you are the caller ?
Presentation :


<b>Pre- speaking </b>


- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put the


sentences in the correct order to make a complete
conversation .


- Call on some pairs to read their answers and write


them on the board :


* Answers : 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c


-Some ss to answer the T’s
questions


Work in whole class


Work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d
- Call on some pairs to practice the conversation
they have arranged .


-Ask Ss some questions to check Ss,<sub>understanding </sub>


and focus on the structure GOING TO
a. Are they talking on the phone ?
b. What do they intend to do ?


c. What time are they meeting ? Where ?


d. What form of the verbs do you use to talk about
intentions ?


<b>=> S + BE + GOING TO + Infinitive</b>
=> Express an intention


<b>While - speaking : </b>



- Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making
arrangements to play chess “


- Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the
dialogue .


- Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Bao
to practice the dialogue .


- Listen and give feedback
Ba : Hello . 8257012


Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This is Bao .
Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ?


Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ?
Ba : Great . Me too.


Bao : Can you play chess tonight ?


Ba : I am sorry . I can not play chess tonight . I am
going to do my homework .


Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ?
Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine .


Bao : I’ll meet you at the Center Chess Club .


Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok . Let ,<sub>s meet at </sub>



the front door .
Bao : Is 2,00, OK ?


Ba : Great . See you tomorrow afternoon at 2.00
o,<sub>clock . </sub>


<b>Post – speaking : - Ask Ss to make similar </b>


dialogue . T can emphasise (nhan manh )the useful
phrases and sentences


-- Ask Ss to make similar arrangements and


Practice the complete dialogue
- Work in pairs


+ Yes , they are


+ They intend to go to the pop
concert


+ They are meeting inside the
center at 7.15


+ be going to


Listen and copy down.
- work individually.



Listen to teacher carefully .
Work in pairs


Practice the complete dialogue
- Work in groups of 3 or 4


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

practice talking with a partner .


-Ask Ss to make sentences with “ Going to +
Infinitive “


Listening:
Setting the scene:


“ You are going to listen a dialogue on the phone
between a secretary of the principal at Kingston
High School and a women”


? Listen to the telephone conversation and fill in the
missing information


- T gives feedback
<b>Post- Teach</b>


? Role play ( one student is Ba, another is Bao)
-T call some pairs after Ss finishe


<b>Home works</b>


- Learn by heart vocabulary and model


- Do exercise 1. 2. 3 in the work book
- Pre-pare READ


Practice asking and answering
- work in pairs .


- Ss listen carefully
- Ss listen and fill
*Answer Key:
- Date: Ss answer
- Time Ss answer
- For The principal


- Message: Mrs Mary Nguyen
wanted to see you at 9.45 in
the morning


-Tel. number 6483720942
- Ss role play


- Some ss practice in pair
- Copy Down


<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<i>Preparing Date : 10/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Ojectives </b>


<b> - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Alexander Graham Bell .</b>
- Ss reading for specific ( ro rang , cu the .chi tiet)information about Alex . G .B .


<b>II. Language contents</b>


<b>1.</b> Vocabulary:


- Some active word of the test
<b>2.</b> Grammar .


- Passive voice.
- Neither…… nor.
- The past simple.


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>Textbooks , posters , pictures of Bill , lesson plan.
<b>IV: Procedure; </b>


<b>* Organizations : - Greeting and asks some questions.</b>


<b>*Checking up : - Asks some Ss to say new words , meaning of these words </b>
- T corrects mistakes and gives them marks.


New lesson :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students' activities</sub></b>



Warm up : * Brainstorming


- Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the
board and write :


To chat with friend


<i><b>+ What is the mobile phone used for ?</b></i>


 Possible answers :


- to have a message
- to call someone
- to make arrangements


- to talk to a person who lives far from
- to get information at the airport or railway


station quickly
<b>Pre - reading : </b>


- Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss .
.Pre teach( vocabulary) :


- to emigrate = to go another country to live
+ emigrant:


- to transmit ( translation )
- to conduct = to carry out:



- to demonstrate ( translation )= perform.
- a device ( translation ):


- deaf – mute( adj) = a person who is unable to
hear and speak.


* Checking vocabulary : <i><b>What and where</b></i>
<i>T / F statements prediction : </i>


- Hang the poster of T / F statements on the board


Play games in 2 teams


Read their answers aloud and copy .


Listen carefully


Listen and repeat in chorus , then
individually .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

and ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which
statements are true or false .


…….a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA
…….b. He worked with deaf – mute patients in a
hospital in Boston .


…….c. Thomas Watson was Bell,<sub>s assistant.</sub>


…...d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone


in 1877 .


……e. Bell experimented his invention at a lot of
exhibitions .


- Call on some pairs to read their predictions and
write them on the board .


<b>While - reading : </b>
* True or false :


-Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at
their books to read the text , then check their
prediction


Guess Answer Correction


a F He was born in Edinburgh in
Scotland


b F He worked with deaf – mute
patients at Boston University


c T


d F He introduced telephone in
1876


e F He experimented with ways of
transmitting speech over a


long distance


f T


- Ask some Ss to read the correct answers aloud .
* Ordering :


- Ask Ss to look at the exercise and read the events
of Bell,<sub>s life , then put them in the correct order .</sub>


- Have them compare with their partners
- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Corrects and give feedback


= > Alexander Graham Bell
1. Was born in Scotland
2. went to live in Canada
3. went to live in the USA


4. worked with people who could neither
speak nor hear


Copy down
Play game


Look at the poster and work in pairs
to predict .


Read their predictions



Listen , read the text , then check their
predictions .


-work in pairs.


- Correct the false ones
(one by one.)


Read them aloud
Do the exercise
Read their answers
work in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

5. worked with Thomas Watson


6. successfully demonstrate his invention
7. invented the telephone .


- Call on some Ss to read all the correct order
sentences aloud .


<b>Post - reading : * Write it up :</b>


- Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell,<sub>s life , </sub>


using the information from the text .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in
front of class .



- Correct mistakes if any and give Suggestions .
<b>Consolidations: </b>


-Retell the main contents of this lesson.
Homework :


1. Copy down their writings .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Compare with their partners .
Read their writings aloud .


- Copy down homeworks.


<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


WEEK 4


<b>Period 10: Unit 2: making arrangements</b>


<b> Lesson 4 : Write</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>* Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a telephone message .</b>


- Develop Ss’ wrinting skill.


<b>II. Language content: </b>


1. vocabulary:
2. Struture:


- Past simple ( review).


<b>III.Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , posters , lesson plan, ...
<b>IV. Procedure: </b>


<b>* Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<b> </b>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 24 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Warm up : * Matching : - T. hang a poster, ask </b>


Ss to go to the board and matching.


- customer • su phuc vu
- furniture • loi nhan, tin nhan
- stationery • khach hang
- midday • van phong pham
- service • buoi trua, giua ngay.
- message • do dac.



+ T. corrects the mistakes.


Pre - writing : * .Chatting :


– Talk to Ss about taking a telephone message
 Have you ever taken a message ,


 When you take a message , what should be
mentioned in the message ?


( Date , time who sent , to whom , content )
<b> Pre – teach( vocabulary ): </b>


- (a) customer = a person who comes to buy
something at a shop .


- (a) delivery : su giao hang (Trans…)


- stationery ( papers ,pens , pencils , rulers .. ):
van phong pham.


- (to) pick somebody up :don ai bang phuong tien
gi …


- (to) taken by :dc nhan boi .
- (to) reach : den, toi gap.


* Checking vocabulary : Rubout and remember
While - writing :



<i>Reading and gap filling </i>


- Ask Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in
the message .


- Ask them to work in pairs


- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
Corrects and give feedback .


A customer phoned/telephoned the Thang Loi
<i>Delivery Service on May 12 just before midday . </i>
<i>She wanted to speak to Mr Ha but he was out . So </i>
<i>Mr Tam took a message for Mr Ha . The </i>


<i>customer,<sub>s name was Mrs . Lien and she wanted </sub></i>


<i>to know about her furniture delivery . She wanted </i>
<i>Mr Ha to call her . She said Mr Ha could reach </i>
<i>her number 8645141 after lunch . </i>


- Ask Ss to read the passage 2 to get information
and write the message .


- Let Ss write individually then share with a
partner .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers
- Correct and give feedback .



<b>Write : </b>


Play game


Practice asking and answering the
questions


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Guess its meanings
Copy down


Play games


Read and do the exercise .


Read their answers aloud
- Work in pairs .


Read the information and write
the message .


Read their answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...


...
...


<b>Period 11: Unit 2: making arrangements</b>



<b> Lesson 5 : language focus</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 16/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>*. Teaching points:By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a telephone message by</b>
listening .


-Listening for details and further practice in adverbs of place.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b> Textbooks , cassette , chalks , postres, lesson plan.
<b>IV. Procedures: </b>


<b>* . Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>*. Checking up : - Checking in the contents of the new lesson .</b>
- T corrects and give them marks.


<b>*. New lesson : </b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>'<sub>activities</sub></b>



Warm up : * Telephone transmitting
- Divide Ss into two teams .


- Choose 6 volunteers from each team


- the volunteers stand in two lines . T. shows the
first student a telephone number .


- He / She whispers the telephone number to the
next person in his / her line .


- The second student whispers to the third ... until
the last one .


- The last student has to shout out the number , if it
is the same as the number teacher shows , that
team wins the match .


New lesson :
Revision words:


- Junior high school :Truong THCS _ cap 2
- The principal : hieu truong .


- (to) wanted


- at the moment : ngay lap tuc, 1luc
- (an) appointment: cuoc hen gap


- available : san co, co hieu luc, co gia tri, co


mat.


<b>Practice :</b>


<i><b>Model sentences :</b></i>


Play game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b>Are you going to see a movie ?</b>
<b>Yes , I am / No , I am not .</b>
<i>*Word cue drill :</i>


a. see a movie ( Yes )
b. play / sports ( No )


c. meet your friends ( Yes)
d. help your mother ( Yes )
e. do your homework (No)
f. watch TV ( No )


- Model two cues , then ask Ss to repeat chorally
then individually .


- Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering in
pairs.


<i>Language focus 1+2 :</i>
*Ask ss to do ex 1 (25 )


eg : Nga has a movie ticket ( What is she going to


do?)


 She is going to see a movie .
T . gets feedback and give answer keys .


<i>* Ex 2 ( 25 ) – Ssplay a game : Find someone who </i>


T asks :


- <i><b>What are you going to do on the weekend ?</b></i>
Are you going to …. ?


+ … meet your friends ?
+…. see a movie ?


+ ….play football ?
+….help your parents ?
+… do ur homeworks ?


+… listen to music/ watch T.V…?.
-T gets feedback .


<b>Consolidations : </b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson .
Homework :


1. Copy the dialogue above .
2. Do exercise in workbook .



3. Learn by heart the main points and new
words.


4. Prepare the next lesson .


movie


Ss interviewer their friends and re
tell about them


-work individually.


Some Ss Retell the main
contents.


_


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 12: Unit 3: At home</b>



<b> Lesson 1 : getting started + Listen and read</b>


<i>Preparing Date : 16/09/2011</i>



<b>I. Objectives: </b>


* Teaching points : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and use
modal verbs to talk about the housework .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Some of words about the object which are used for cooking.


2. Grammar: have to , ought to


<b>III. Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , cassette , pictures, postes, lesson plan.
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>*. Organization : - Greetinmg and checking attendance .</b>
<b>*. Checking up : </b>


-T. asks Ss some questions :


-What did you do to help your mom after school?
- Asks some Ss to answer the questions .


T. corrects and give them marks.
* <i>possible answers :</i>


<i> - cook meas / wash clothes / Tidy up / Feed the chicken / sweep the floor….</i>


<b>*. New lesson :</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students' activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Kim<b>,<sub>s game ( Getting started )</sub></b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

the verbs in the pictures as many as possible


- Which team remembering more verbs is the winner.
 Answer :


a. Wash dishes / do the washing up


b. Make the bed / to fold the clothes neatly( gap quan
ao ngay ngan)


c. Sweep the floor ./d. Cook / e. Tidy up
f. Feed the chicken


* Presentation : Introduce the topic of the passage
and some new words


* Pre- teach (Vocabulary ):


- (a) steamer : noi hap, noi dun hoi.
-( a) cupboard : chan , tủ chạn
-( a) saucepan : chảo


- chore (n) : viec vat trong nha, cong viec noi tro.
-( a) sink : bon rua, chau rua.


* Checking techniques : <i>What and where</i>


- Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam and his


mother , Mrs Vui .


- Ask Ss to complete the list of the things Nam has to
do .


- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books
and read their complete sentences :


<i><b> * Nam has to: </b></i>
<i><b> - cook dinner .</b></i>


<i><b> - go to the market to buy fish and vegestables.</b></i>
<i><b> - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask her to meet his </b></i>
<i><b>mother at grandma</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s house .</sub></b></i>


<b>Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive </b>


<b> Model : What do you have to do ? </b>
I must do the washing up .
-> Use the picture cues drill :


a. do the washing up / b. make the bed
c. sweep the floor /d. cook dinner
e. tidy my room / f. feed the chickens .
- Call on some Ss to practice in front of class
* Have Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs .


<b>Language focus 3 : - Reflexive pronouns :</b>
<b>Form: I -> myself./ We -> ourselves / …</b>
<b>Usage :</b>



<b>Ex ercise: Asks Ss to do exercise 3 (35).</b>
- Complete the dialogues.


- T. corrects and give answer keys.


+ Production :


- Ask Ss to write the lists of the things they have to do
on Sundays .


<i>Beginning with</i> : On Sunday morning , I have to tidy


Play game


_ Some Ss stand up and speak loudly.


- Copy new lesson.
- read in chorus.


Listen and copy down .


Repeat in chorus and individually
Guess its meanings and copy
Play game


Listen carefully


Listen to the tape while looking at
their books .



Read their sentences they have
completed


Copy and give examples


Practice in pairs


Read the dialogue in pairs .
Write individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

my room ...


- Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of
class.


- Correct mistakes if any and ask them to copy .
<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main contents of this leson .
<b> Homework : </b>


1. Learn by heart all new words they have learnt .
2. Do their exercises in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and copydown homeworks .


<b>EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>



...
...
...
...


<b>Week 5 - ki</b>



<b>Period 13: Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 2 : speak</b>



<i>Preparing Date :21/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the prepositions of places to </b>
talk about the positions in the house .


- Develop’s Ss speaking skill.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Things in the kichen and living room.
2. Grammar: Review: Where is…….? It’s…………


Where are……? They are………….
Let’s………..


I think we ought to………..



<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Pictures , chalks , leson plan, poster.
<b>IV: procedure </b>


<b>1. Organizations: -</b> Greeting and checking attendance .


<b>2. Checking up :Asks some Ss to retell the new words of last lesson.</b>
- T. corrects and give marks.


<b>3. New lesson : </b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>
Warm up : * Kim<b>,<sub>sgame</sub></b>


- Devide the class into 2 teams


- Show the picture of a chicken to Ss .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

- Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down as
many things as they can remember .


- Which team having more things win games .
Pre - Speaking :


- Ask Ss the positions of the items in the pictures .
Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge .
Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl .
Where is the flowers ? They are on the table .


Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bwl of fruit .
Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above the


counter .


Where are the knives ? They are on the wall , under
the cupboard .


Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter , next to
the bowl of fruit .


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .


While - speaking :


- Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the position of
each item


Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove . -
Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class.
- Give feedback :


+ The sink is next to the stove .


+ The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter .
+ The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard .
+ The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and the
dish rack .


+ The clock is on the wall , above the fridge .
+ The flowers are on the table .



- Ask them to read all the suggested sentences aloud .
<b> Post - speaking : </b>


- Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new furniture


for her living room , but she can not decide
where to put it . You should help her to arrange
the furniture”


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about their
ideas .


 Ask Ss to practice speaking :


- If they agree , they may use :


Ok


You are right


- If they disagree , they may use :


No , I think we ,<sub>d better / ought to put ...</sub>


I think it should be ...
Example :


- Let us put the clock on the wall , between the shelf


Practice asking and answering about


the positions of each item .


Work in pairs


Read all the sentences aloud .
Listen carefully .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

and the picture .


- OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo
on the shelf …..


- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .


<b>Consolidation : - Retell the main contents of this </b>
lesson.


Homework :


1. Describe their living room or bedroom .
2. Do exercise in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Read the examples


Practice speaking .
Listen and copy .


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>



...
...
...
...


<b>Period 14: Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 3 : listen</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 21/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to identify the right item by listening .
- Develop Ss listening skill.


<b>II. Language contents</b>:


1. Vocabulary: Some ingredients.
2. Grammar:


<b>III Teaching aids</b> : Cassette , textbooks , chalks , lesson plan , poster .
<b>IV. Procedures : </b>


<b>1. Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>2. Checking up :</b>


- Asks Ss complete the list of things Nam has to do ex2 ( 28 ) – 2 Students to talk.
- Two others Use “ought to” to give advice b- d (35).



+ T corrects and give answer keys .=> give them marks .
<i>* Keys ( possible answer):</i>


a) - He has to go to the market to buy fish and vegetables.


- He has to call Aunt Chi ask her to meet his mother at his grandma’s house .
b) + b - You ought to get up earlier.


+ d - You ought to go to a dentist .
<b>3. New lesson :</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>
Warm up : * <b>Bingo</b>


- Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5


things you can eat .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

in a loud voice .


- Ss listen to the teacher carefully . If anyone has


the same things , they cross them out . The first
person crossing out all 5 things shouts “ Bingo
“ and wins the game .


 Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef , cake ,
candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice , ham ,
peas ...



Pre - listening :
* Predictions :


- Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they use
to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “


- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on
the board .


<b>While - listening : </b>


- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask them to check their
predictions .


- Give feedback
a. Fired Rice
b. Pan


c. Garlic and green peppers
d. Ham and peas .


- Turn on the tape once more to check the answers
again .


<b> Post - listening : Mapped dialogue </b>


- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to


make a dialogue by listening the tape again .
<i><b>Lan : Can I help ..., Mom ?</b></i>



<i><b>Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook ...</b></i>
<i><b>Use the big pan please .</b></i>


<i><b>Lan : ...?</b></i>


<i><b>Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot and then </b></i>
<i><b>fry the garlic and the green peppers .</b></i>


<i><b>Lan : ...?</b></i>


<i><b>Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice and s </b></i>
<i><b>teaspoon of salt in .</b></i>


<i><b>Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ... .</b></i>


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front
of class .


- Correct pronunciations if any .
<b>Consolidations: </b>


Retell the main points of this lesson.
Homework :


1. Copy down the dialogue in their notebooks .
2. Do exercise ... in workbook .


Play game



-Look at their books and guess 4
things , they use to cook the “ Special
Chinese Fried Rice “


- Read their predictions


Listen to the tape carefully to check
their predictions .


Copy the answers .


Listen and check once more .
Listen individually


Practice in pairs to make a dialogue .


Work inpairs


Practice in front of class


Listen and copy .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

3 . Prepare the next lesson .


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...



<b>Period 15: Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 4 : read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 22/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the safety precautions in the house and
use Why- because .


- Develop Ss’ reading skill.


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , Cassette , pictures , realias , lesson plan
<b>III. procedure : </b>


<b>1. Organization : Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>2. Checking up: Asks Ss talk some steps to make the “Special Chinese Fried Rice”.</b>
- T corrects and give them marks


<i><b>*Possible answers : </b></i>


1.Put the little oil in the big pan.
2. Heat the pan.


3. Fry the garlic and the green peppers.
4. Put the ham and peas in .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>



<i>Vũ Thế Phong 34 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


Warm up : Brainstorming
 Possible answers :


drug / electricity / boiling water / fire / gas /
knife./ bead / glass …


Things danger
<i><b> in home for children.</b></i>
- Ask them to copy down .


Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss


Pre – teach vocabulary :


- a precaution = sự phòng ngừa , sự đè phòng
- a socket ( realia ) / a bead : vat tron nho
- a match ( realia )


- an object = vật , đồ vật
- safety (n ) = sự an toàn
- to destroy = phá huỷ


- to injure ( situation ) : Gay thuong tich
* Checking : Slap the board



True / false statements predictions


- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is
true , which is false .


<b>Statements</b> <b>Guess</b> <b>Key</b>
1. It is safe to leave medicine


around the house .


2. Drugs can look like candy .
3. A kitchen is a suitable place to
play .


4. Playing with one match can
not start a fife .


5. Putting a knife into an
electrical socket is dangerous .
6. Young children do not


understand that many house hold
objects are dangerous .


F
T
F
F
T
T



- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them
on the board .


<b>While - reading : </b>
Reading the text :


- Turn on the tape , Ss look at poster to check their
prediction.


- Have them correct the statements which are false
1. It is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboards .
3. A kitchen is dangerous place to play .


4. Playing with one match can cause fire.
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud ( 2 Ss )
2. Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to find out the answers of
these questions .


Play game in two teams


Write down


Listen to the topic .


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually



Guess its meaning s and copy
Play game in 2 teams


Read and predict


Read their predictions aloud .


Listen to the tape . look at the poster
to check their predictions .


- Correct the false ones .
- Read the aloud


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>IV. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Week 6 -ki</b>



<b>Period 16: Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 5 : write</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 26/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>1. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a description of a room in </b>


their house .


- Develop Ss writing skill .
<b>2. Language contents: </b>


a,Vocabulary: Some object in the kitchen
b,Grammar: preposition of position.


<b>II.Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , chalks , board , lesson plan.
<b>III. procedure: </b>


<b>1. Organization : Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>2. Checking up: Asks 2 Ss to say some things danger in home for children.</b>
- T. corrects and give them marks.


<b>3. New lesson :</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Chatting


<i>( Asking something about the room on page 32 )</i>
1. Which room is this ?


2. What is this ? / Where is it ?


Pre - writing : Introduce the aims and some new
words to Ss :



Pre- teach vocabulary :


- folder (n)bia (dung de cat dan thu cong)
- beneath : (pre) Khoang duoi > < above.
- dish rack (n) gia de bat dia.


- lighting fixture (n) den chum


- Container : (n) cai dung , cai chua ( chai , lo,
binh…)


* Checking : Rub out and remember
Reading


- Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa,<sub>sroom , </sub>


then ask some comprehension questions
a. What is there on the left of the room ?
b. Where is the bookshelf ?


c. What is there on the right side of the room ?


Play game


Listen and copy the title of the
lesson .


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .



Guess its meanings and copy .
Play game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

d. Where is the wardrobe ?


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct and give feedback :


a. There is a desk on the left of the room .
b. The bookshelf is above the desk .


c. There is a window on the right side of the
room .


d. The wardrobe is beside the window and
opposite the desk .


- Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa,<sub>s </sub>


room aloud .
While - writing :


- Ask Ss to describe Hoa,<sub>s kitchen , using the </sub>


given cues .


- Ask Ss to share with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in
front of class .



- Correct the mistakes from some descriptions if
any .


- Give feedback


<i><b>This is Hoa</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s kitchen . </sub></b></i>


<i><b>There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the </b></i>
<i><b>room . </b></i>


<i><b>Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the </b></i>
<i><b>oven </b></i>


<i><b>On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and</b></i>
<i><b>next to the sink is a towel rack . </b></i>


<i><b>The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right</b></i>
<i><b>of the window and beneath the selves . </b></i>


<i><b>On the selves and on the counter beneath the </b></i>
<i><b>window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . </b></i>
<i><b>In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table </b></i>
<i><b>and four chairs . </b></i>


<i><b>The lighting fixture is above the table , and </b></i>
<i><b>directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase </b></i>
<i><b>with flowers . </b></i>


- Call on some Ss to read the completed


descriptions aloud .


<b>Post- writing : * Speaking </b>


- Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room /
living room / kitchen .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in
front of class .


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Read the description aloud .
Work individually


Compare with their friends


Demonstrate their writings in front
of class


- Describe the Hoa’skitchen.
- Work individually.


Read the completed writing aloud .
(one by one)


Practice speaking .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

- Retell the main contents of this lesoon.
Homework :



1. Write a description of their living room .
2. Do exercises in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


- Practice
- Copy down


<b>IV. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 17: Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 6 : language focus</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 26/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>* Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the Reflexive Pronouns , </b>
modal verbs to talk about the house work and know how to use Why - Because .


<b>II.Teaching aids : Textbook , boards , chalks , lesson plan,posters.</b>
<b>III. Language contents</b>:


1. vocabulary: Unit 3



2. Grammar: Reflexive pronouns, modal verbs Why- because.


<b>IV. procedure :</b>


<b>1. Organization: - Greeting and Ask some questions.</b>
<b>2. Checking up: T. asks some Qs in Ex2 (32).</b>


- Ss answer the questions.


- T. corrects and give them marks.
<b>3. New lesson</b> :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Brainstorming
- tidy up


- do our homework
Things you - cook


can do - water flower
- clean the floor
- repair the machine
- fix the TV set
Things you - paint the house
can not do -


-



- Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “
- Listen and correct mistakes if any
Language focus :


1. Reflexive pronouns


- Set the scene “ You do your homework and no
one helps you . What do you say ? “


Play game in two teams.


- one by one of each team to talk.


Talk the things you can do / can
not do


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

I did my homework myself .
-> Explain the reflexive Pronouns
- > Form : We use I with myself


You ... yourself / yourselves
He ...himself


She ...herself
We ...ourselves
They ... themselves
It ... itself


- Emphasis( nhan manh, tam quan trong) pronouns
: Used to emphasize a person or a thing .



Eg : She cut herself .


John saw himself in the mirror .
 Complete the dialogue :


- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive
pronouns or emphasis pronouns .


- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
- Give feedback :


a. himself b. ourselves c. myself / yourself
d. himself / herself / themselves e. yourself .
- Ask them to practice the complete dialogue .
2. Modal verbs


- Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she
failed her English test . What do you say to advise
her ? “


“ You should study harder “


 Another word for “ should “ : Ought to
Ought to + Infinitive


<b>Exercises:</b>


- Ex 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the
pictures ( Language focus 2 )



- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :


a. I failed my English test .
You ought to study harder
b. You ought to get up earlier .


c. You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables .
d. You ought to see a dentist .


* Checking : Noughts and crosses :
His tooth /


ache


Hoa / late My room /
untidy
The floor /


dirty


Bao /
overweight


She / thin
My English / Hergrades / The washing





-- Work individually.


Write down and give examples


- Work in pairs to complete the
dialogue


- Practice speaking
- Works in pairs.


Listen and copy


- Practice in front of class.
- copy down if necessary.
- Works in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

bad bad machine / not
work


 Using “ Should “ to play game .


Ex 1 : Look at the pictures . Complete the dialogue
, Use Must or Have to and the verbs in the box :
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue :
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class.


- Give feedback


1. must / have to tidy ; 2. have to / must dust


3. must / have to sweep ; 4. must / have to clean
5. have to / must empty ; 6. must / have to feed .
<b>Consolidation: Retell contents of this lesson.</b>
<b> Homework : </b>


1. Do exercise 4 ( language focus 4 )
2. Copy all the exercises above .
3. Prepare the test .


Work in pairs


-> Demonstrate in front of class .


- Practice


Listen and copy .
<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 18: consolidation</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 27/09/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate all structure grammar from unit 1 to unit


3 .They can to do all exercises in work book.


- Develop Ss’ 4 skills ( listening, Speaking, reading and writing.)


<b>II. Laguage contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:
2. Gramamar:


<b>III. Preparation</b>:


Lesson plan, textbook, posters...


<b>IV. procedure : </b>


<b>1.Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance. </b>


<b>2. Checking up: - Asks some Ss retell some structure grammar from unit 1to unit 3.</b>
-T. copy down on the board.


- T.hang a poster give main structure grammar, and give them marks.III.
<b>3.New lesson</b>:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>


<b>New lesson : Asks Ss to do exercises. Using some </b>
old structure grammar.( T hang a poster , give
some Structure Grammar)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

Ex 1 : 1. <i><b>Choose the best answer to complete the </b></i>


<i><b>sentences</b></i>:


1. He’s tall and thin. He has _______
A. black hair short B. short black hair
C. hair short black D. black short hair


2. I find he is not communicative. He’s rather
_____.


A. outgoing B. humorous
C. sociable D. reserved


3. Don’t let your little brother play with the
ballpoint pen. It can


_________________him.


A. move B. sweep


C. injure D. destroy


4. The lighting fixture is ______ the dinner
table.


A. above B. on


C. beneath D. under


5. He’ll ____________cook meals himself.
A. can B. must



C. have to D. ought to
6. Deaf-mutes can _______speak


________hear.


A. both – and B. either – or
C. neither – nor D. not only – but also
7. Our son is old enough to look after _______.


A. himself B. herself
C. myself D. ourselves


8. Don’t come in. Please wait _______for your
turn.


A. inside B. outside
C. upstairs D. downstairs
9. Alexander Graham Bell was born


________March, 3, 1847.


A. at B. in


C. on D. from


10. Would you like to go to the concert with me
tonight? - _____________________.


A. Yes, please B. No, thanks


C. I’m sorry. I’d love to D. Yes. I’d love to
<i><b>2 Rewrite each sentence keeping the same </b></i>


<i><b>meaing</b></i>:


1. Your little brother can’t study in this school
because he is still young.


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs


Read the example


Read their complete sentences


Work in pairs


- Choose the best answer.


- Demonstrate in front of class .


Work individually , one student one
word


Go to the board to write the
meanings and read them aloud .
Listen to the scene .


Work in pairs



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

Your little brother isn’t __________________
2. Her hair is short, curly and blonde.


She has______________________________
3. Driving too fast is very dangerous.


It __________________________________
4. Do you plan to invite her to your birthday
party ?


Are _______________________________
Ask Ss to do exercise.They have to work with a
partner and say what the people are going to do .
- Ask Ss to go to the board to do exercises.
<b>3</b><i><b>. Look at the piture and describe the bedroom </b></i>
<i><b>with the things below</b></i>:


0. This is my Lan’s bedroom
1. There / a desk / the left / the room
2. There / a chair / the desk


3. The bed / the middle / the room


4. On the right side / the room there / a window
5. The clock / the wall, / the bed


6. The bookshelf / the wall, /the desk
7. The wardrobe / the desk



8. The cushion / the bed


<b>Consolidation :</b>


- Retell the main contents of this lesson .
Homework :


1.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks .
2. Write six sentences about your house , using
adverbs of place .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Read the complete sentences
aloud .


Copy down .
Do exercise 4 .


- Work in pairs . Describe the
picture.


- One by one to talk loudly
- The others write down on


their notebooks.
-Retell the main points.
Copy down homeworks.


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b>Period 19: Test 45 minutes </b>

<b>(number 1)</b>


<i>Preparing Date : 2/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>1. Teaching points: Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do the test </b>
well .


<b>2. Language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar:


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Papers , chalks and boards .


<b>III. Procedure: </b>


<b>1. Organization:</b>
<b>2. Checking up:</b>
<b>3. Contents:</b>


<b>I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets (1.5)</b>
1. I ( read / am reading / am going to read )a book about astrology at the moment
2. We ( go / are going / will go ) to a party on Saturday .


3. Nurses ( look / are looking / are going to look ) after people in hospital .
4. Jane ( comes / is coming / will come ) form Ireland .


5. I( speak / am speaking / will speak ) speak four languages .



6. ( Do you want / are going to want / are wanting ) to go out tonight ?
<b>II / Put the sentences into the right order to make a logical dialogue </b> : ( 2p )
a. Yes , I am


b. Isn,<sub>t that Lan</sub>,<sub>s father , my dear ? </sub>


c. How do you do ?


d. Excuse me ! Are you Mr Viet ?
e. I am not sure . Go and ask him .
f. I am Nam – Hoa,<sub>s father </sub>


1…... 2……. 3……. 4…….. 5……... 6…….


<b>III / Rewrite these sentences , beginning as shown , so that the meaning stays the same</b><i> ( 2P ) </i>
1. He is not tall , so he can not reach the shelf . => He is not ………..


2. The book was interesting . I read it twice . => The book was interesting ……..
3. I will phone you tomorrow morning . => I will give ……….


4. Putting a knife into an electrical socket is dangerous . => It is dangerous ……
<b>IV . Read the text and fill the gap True(T) or False(F). (2p ):</b>


“ I am peter. I’m going to look for a new job and a new flat next month. I’m going to look in the
newspapers and ask all my friends for help.I’d like to move to a quieter town because I can’t
stand the noise . I’m going to stay where I am this time next year – I know that .”


a. Peter is living in a noisy town .
b. He is not going to change his job.



c. He thinks that his friends will help him .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>V / Write a paragraph about Lan , using the information in the table : (1.5</b>p )
Name : Nguyen Huong Lan


Appearance : thin , tall , short black hair
Characters : friendly , humorous , helpful


Address : 25 Quang Trung Street , Nam Dinh
Family : mother , father , younge sister – Hai
Friends : Mai and Ba


<b>VI / Listen to the tape and write a message:</b>
Date :


Time :
For :


Message………
………
Taken by :


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...



<b>Period 20: correcting the Test 45 minutes </b>

<b>(number 1)</b>


<i>Preparing Date : 3/10/2011</i>
I / 1,5 ps Ss get 0,25 ps for each correct one


1. am reading 2. are going 3. look 4. comes 5. speak 6. Do you want
II / 1,5 ps .


1. d 2. a 3 . c 4 . f 5. b 6. e
III / 2,0 Ss get 0,5 ps for each correct one


1. He is not tall enough to reach the shelf .


2. The book was interesting enough foe me to read twice .
3. I will give you a ring tomorrow morning .


4. Is is dangerous to put a knife into an electrical socket
IV.


V / 3,0 . : Write enough information , grammar correctly , right form
VI / 2,o ps


<b>VI / Listen to the tape and write a message</b>:


Date :……….
Time :………
For :……….
Message………
………
Taken by :



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on may 11 just twelve o<i>,<sub>clock . The </sub></i>


<i>customer,<sub>s name was Mr Nam , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Van . Mrs Van was in a meeting </sub></i>


<i>and could not come to the phone . So Ms Toan took a message . Mr Nam called about his </i>
<i>stationery order . He said Mrs Van could reach him at 884 . 846. </i>


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 21: Unit 4: our past</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<i>Preparing Date : 4/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>*Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell the activities people used to </b>
do in the past .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar:


<b>III. Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , cassette , chalks, leson plan, picture.


<b>IV. Procedure: </b>


<b>1. Organization : - Greeting .</b>
<b>2. Checking up :</b>


- Asks Ssretell some structures grammar of last lesson .
- T corrects and give them marks.


<b>3. New lesson</b> :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Student’s </sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Getting started


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and write the names of
the things that do not belong to the past .


* Answers :


- The TV / The radio / The mobile / The light fixture
- Modern clothing / school uniforms


Pre - reading :


Pre- teach vocabulary


- used to + v : da tung ( trans…)
- to look after = to take care of


- (an)Equipment (n) Trang thiet bi - example


- a folktale : Tam Cam is a folk tale : chuyen dan gian.
- (a) tale: chuyen co tich


( explain..)


- Traditional ( adj ) thuoc ve truyen thong. (trans.. )
-( a) great grandfa / great grandma(n)cụ ông / cụ bà.
- Lost : (v) mất. / Lit(v) thắp , đốt ( đèn) (
.explain)


- once (adv)ngµy xa. (explain )
* Checking : What and where


T / F statements prediction


- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are
true or false .


Statements Guess Key


1. Nga is used to live on farm
2. Nga ,<sub>s grandma did not go to </sub>


school .


3. She has an easy and happy life
when she was young .


4. There was not any modern



F
T
F
T


Play game in two teams.
-One by one go to the board.


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Guess its meanings and copy
down


Play game


Work in groups


- read the statements and
predict.


-Read their predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

equipment at her time .


5. “ The lost shoe “ is a short story


F
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on
the board .



<b>While - reading : </b>


- Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their books to
read the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to
check their predictions


- Ask them to correct the false statements .
1. Grandma used to love on farm


3. She had a hard life .
5. It is an old folk tale .
* Comprehension :


- Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering
questions


- Give feedback


a. She used to live on a farm .


b. Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom
to look after her younger brothers and sisters .


c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and
wash the clothes .


d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great
father used to tell stories .



e.She asked her grandma to tell her the tale“The lost
shoe“


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions .


* Fact or opinion


- Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide which
is a fact and which is a pinion .


<b>Statements</b> <b>Fact Opinion</b>


a. I used to live on a farm .
b. There was not any electricity .
c. Mom had to do everything
without the help of modern
equipment .


d. My father used to tell us stories
e. The best one was the lost shoe .
f. Traditional stories are great .


X
X
X
X


X
X


- Give feedback


Post - reading : * Survey


Did you use to ...? Name
Get up late. / Ride bicycle too fast .


Go to school. / Eat too much candy


- Correct the false ones
- work in pairs


Practice asking and answering
the questions .


Read the statements and decide
which is a fact and which is a
opinion


- Practice in groups


Demonstrate in front of class .


Listen and copy .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

.


Forget to do your homework .


- Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to check


“ Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too fast ...? “
- Write it down .


<b>Consolidation: Retell the main points .</b>
Homework :


1. Write the result of their survey .
2. Learn by heart new words .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b> Week 8 </b>

<b>Period 22: Unit 4: our past</b>


<b>Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 10/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk about the things they used to do</i>


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , word cards for drilling</i> .
<b>III. Procedure: </b>


<b>1. Organization: - Greeting and ask some questions.</b>


<b>2. Checking up: - Ask Ss to stand up and retell new words of last lesson.( say about the </b>
meaning, form.)


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
<b>3. New lesson :</b>



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>


Warm up : Jumbled words
- rieletcicty = Electricity
- menttaenterin = Entertainment
- rkmaet = Market


- permasuekt = Supermarket
<b>A. Speaking</b>


Pre - speaking :


 Recall the conversation between Nga and her
grandma , then ask “ Where did Nga,<sub>s grandma </sub>


always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm .
- Ask : “ Another word for always lived “ .


Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and answer.
“ Where did Nga ,<sub>s grandma use to live ? “ </sub>


She used to live on a farm .
 Form : S + Used to + inf


S + did not use to + inf
Did + S + use to + inf ?


 Expressing a past habit , or an action usually
happened in the past .



 Practice
Word cue drill


a. Live / Hue / Hanoi


b. Have / long hairs / short hairs
c. Get up / late / early


d. Walk to school / bicycle


e. Study / evening / early morning
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the cues above .


<b>While - speaking : </b>


- Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs .
- Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “ USED
TO “ to talk about the actions in the past , using


Play games


- One by one to go to the board to
write.


Practice reading the conversation
and answer the questions


Listen and copy


- Practise in pairs


Practice speaking with cues


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

these ideas below :


1. Where did they live in the past ? And now ?
2. How did they travel ?


3. What is about the electricity ?
4. What is about their life / work ?
5. Did children use to go to school ?
6. What is about their entertainment ?


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback .


* Suggested answers :


1. People used to live in small houses . Now they
live in big houses and buildings.


2. People used to walk . Now they can go by cars or
motorbikes .


3. Now , there is electricity everywhere .


4. People used to work hard all the time . Now they
have a lot of time for entertainment .



5. Most children used to stay at home . Now , they
all go to school .


6. Children used to play traditional games such as
hide and seek , skip rope ... outdoors . Now , they
have a lot of modern games – video games .
Post - speaking : * Write it up


- Ask Them to write a complete writing about the
difference of the life in the past and now.


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Correct common mistakes .


<b>B. Listening:</b>


Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening
task


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- Foolish (a) = ngí ngÈn , ngèc nghÕch
- greedy ( a) = tham lam


- Gold (n) ( realia )


- to lay -> laid – laid ( Picture )
- amazement (n) = ng¹c nhiªn


* Checking : What and where


2. Prediction :


- Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story .
- Have them look at four titles and guess which is
the most suitable to the story .


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


While - listening :


Demonstrate in front of class
- One by one


- copy down if necessary


Listen and copy


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually


Copy down
Play game


Work in groups to predict .
Read their predictions
aloud .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

1. Checking the prediction



- Turn on the tape twice and ask them to check their
predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their results and give feed
back : “ Don,<sub>t be foolish and greedy “</sub>


- Turn on the tape once more to check their results
again .


2. Find out the verbs in the story :


- Ask Ss what tense is used in the story ( Simple
past tense )


- Have Ss listen again and try to write as many verbs
as possible . The student who writes more verbs get
good marks .


- Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud .


- Give feedback: went / discovered / laid / shouted /
<i>finished / could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / </i>
<i>decided .</i>


- Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs.
<b>Post - listening : </b><i><b>Mapped dialogue</b></i>


Lan : ...lunch ?
Nga : No . I ate noodles .



Lan : How ... school ?
Nga : I rode a bicycle to school .


Lan : Which subject did you have yesterday ?
Nga : ... math .


Lan : ...?
Nga : I was at home .


- Ask them to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct and give feedback .


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>Homework : </b>


1. Write about the things you used to do last year .
<i>Beginning : Last year , I used to get up late . Now , </i>
I get up very early and do morning exercises . ... ...


2. Do exercise in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


predictions



Read their results and write
down .


Listen and find out the verbs in
the tape


Read them aloud .


Give the infinitives of these
verbs .


Practice in pairs


Work individually .
- Retell the main points


- Listen and copy .


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

...
...
...


<b>Period 23: Unit 4: our past</b>


<b>Lesson 3 : Read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 10/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>



<b>* Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand and retell the story - </b>
The lost shoe .


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Text book , word cards for drilling , cassette ,lesson plan and picture...
<b>III. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar:


<b>IV. Procedures: </b>


<b>1. Organization: Greeting </b>


<b>2. Checking up: -Retell the Story “ Don’t be foolish and greedy” .</b>
- T. corrects and give them marks.


<b>3</b>. New lesson:


T’ activities. Ss’ activities.


* Warm up : * Brainstorming


Name some folks tales that you have read .
 Possible answers :


- Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo )
- Tấm cám . / Hồng tử Cóc ( The frog Prince )
- Đôi hài 7 dặm ( Seven – mile shoes )



- Bạch tuyết và bảy chú lùn ( Snow white and 7
dwarfs )


I / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt
- upset (a) = worried


- fairy (n) = truỵện cổ tÝch
- magical (a) -> magically (adv)
- rag (n) ( realia )


- to fall in love with = yªu


- immediately (adv ) = ngay lËp tøc
* Checking : R& R


2. T / F statements predictions


- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict


Statements Guess Key


Play games in two teams


Copy some names of the stories in
English .



Listen and copy


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

1. Little Pea,<sub>s father is poor </sub>


farmer


2. Her father got married again
after his wife died .


3. Her new mother was beautiful
and nice to her .


4. She worked hard all day .
5. She did not have new clothes
to take part in the festival .


T
T
F
T
F


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board


II / While - reading :



1. Checking the predictions :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at
their text books to check their predictions and
correct the false ones .


- Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to her .
- Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes.
- Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct mistakes if
any.


2. Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the questions
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and


answering .


- Listen and give feedback


a. She was a poor farmer ,<sub>s daughter . </sub>


b. She made her do the chores all day .


c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and
magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes .
d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe
fitted her .


e. Ss answer themselves .



- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words
from the story .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with
suitable words from the story .


- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences
aloud


- Give feedback
a. farmer b. died


c. used d. marry / choose
e. clothes f. lost


III / Post - reading : *Retell the story


- Works in pairs


Play games


Work in groups


Read their predictions


Listen and check their predictions
.



Read their results and correct the
false ones .


Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions
Work in pairs to complete the
sentences


Read their complete sentences .
Listen and copy .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

- Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in
details ( They can look at the statements in the gap
filling exercise and add more )


- Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of
class .


- Correct mistakes if any .
<b>Consolidations:</b>


- Retell the mains points.
Homework :


1. Rewrite the story .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


details .



Demonstrate in front of class .


Listen and copy .


- Ss copy down
<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>Period 24: Unit 4: our past</b>



<b>Lesson 4 : write</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 10/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


<b>* Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Simple Past Tense to write a </b>
folk tale .


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards ,lesson plan.
<b>III. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: Past simple tense.



<b>IV. Procedure: </b>


<b>1. Organization: - Greeting </b>


<b>2. Checking up:- Retell the story “the foolish famer and greedy wife”</b>
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


<b>3</b>. New lesson:


<b>T’ activities.</b> <b>Ss’ activities.</b>


Warm up : * Chatting


- Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories
1. Do you want to read imaginary stories ?
2. Name some of them


3. Which story do you like best ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

4. Have you ever read the story “ how the tigers got
his stripes “ ?


Pre - writing : Introduce the aims of the writing
and some new words .


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n
- a stripe (n) ( realia )
- a straw ( n) ( realia )



- a servant (n) : ngêi phôc vô , đầy tớ
- to graze ( picture )


- to escape : trèn tho¸t


- to light – lit – lighted ( mime )
* Checking : Matching


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1. wisdom a. trốn thoát
2. a stripe b. đờng sọc
3. a straw c. ăn cỏ , gặm cỏ
4. a servant d. trí khơn


5. graze e. rơm rạ
6. escape f . đầy tớ


- Ask Ss to come to the board to match items on the
left with those on the right by drawing a line


connecting the story .
* Reading :


- Ask Ss to read and complete the story .


- Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the
box .



- Have them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to
fill in the blanks .


- Call on them to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback


1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left
5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped
+ Comprehension questions :


1. where was the man ?


2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger
appeared ?


3. What did the tiger want to know ?


4. What did he do before going home ? Why ?
5. What did he do when he returned ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions above .


While - writing :


- Get Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to imagine to be
a man in order to write the story )


+ Notice : Change



The man -> I / His -> My


Listen and copy


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Guess its meanings and copy


Work individually .


Read the verbs in the box and say
the meanings of them .


Read the complete story .


Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- Ask Ss to work individually , then share with their
partners and correct mistakes .


- Take some writings to correct in front of the class.
- Give suggested answers :


Post - writing : * Telling the story


- Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the
role of the tiger . Team B plays the role of the
buffalo



- Ask them to work in team , telling the story
Notice :


- Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I
- Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > I
<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points.
Homework :


1. Write the story again , imagine you are :
* The tiger


* The buffalo


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Demonstrate in front of class.


Play the roles of tiger and buffalo ,
telling the story .


Listen and copy .


Ss copy down.
<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...


...
...
...


<b> Week 9</b>


<b>Period 25: Unit 4: our past</b>


<b>Lesson 5 : language focus</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 17/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b> <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use prepositions of time and Used to</i>
<i>( to talk about the action which always happens in the past ) and further practice in the Past </i>
<i>Simple Tense .</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>III. Procedure : </b>


<b>T activities.</b>’ <b>Ss activities.</b>’
I / <b>Warm up</b> :


<b>Matching </b>


A B Key


1. In a. January 1.a / d


2. On b. 3 p m 2. c / e


3.At c. Wednesday 3. b / f



4. Between d. November 1997 4. f
5. After / Before e. July 2nd <sub>5. b</sub>


f. 7 a m and 9 am
- Call on some Ss to read aloud each phrase .


- Explain the uses of some prepositions of time and
ask Ss to do Exercises


II / <b>Practice </b>


1. Ex 3 / page 44


- Ask Ss to work individually , then compare with
their partners .


- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences
aloud .


- Give feedback


<i>a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before</i>
2. Ex 4 : Complete the dialogue :


- Have Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs , using
USED TO with the verbs “ Live – Stay – Have –
be “ to complete the dialogue between Nga and
Hoa .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .


- Give feedback .


<i>0. used to stay </i>
<i>1. used to have </i>
<i>2. used to be </i>
<i>3. used to live </i>


III / <b>Further practice</b> :


<b>Deliberate mistakes</b>


- Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to listen
carefully and try to find out the mistake . When they
hear a mistake , they stand up and say No then
correct it .


Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday
Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday .


a. My father used to play football when he has
spare time .


b. She used live in Ha noi .


c. My parents will arrive in 3 o,<sub>lock .</sub>


d. He was born in June the third .
IV / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Do exercises (1,2) in textbook .


2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Play game


Read the correct phrases aloud


Work individually .Compare with
their partners .


Read the complete sentences aloud .
Copy down .


Work in pairs


Practice the dialogue .


Play game
( Whole class )


Listen and copy .


<b>IV. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

...
...


<b>Period 26: Unit 5: study habits</b>



<b>Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read</b>




<i>Preparing Date : 17/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom
about his study .


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Text books , cassette , chalks,CD, lesson plan ..
<b>III. Language contents</b>:


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: Adverbs of manner, madal verbs, should, commands.
<b>IV. Procedure : </b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Ss’activities</b>


Warm up : ** Net work


- Ask Ss to write as many subjects as they can on
the blackboard


* Possible answers :


Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature /
history .


- Lead in the new lesson by Chatting
<b>Pre - reading : </b>



- What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ?


Work in groups to play games


Read the answers aloud.
Chat the questions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

- What subject do you like best ? / Why ?
- How often do you have maths ? / Literature..?
1. Pre- teach vocabulary :


- a report card ( realia ): phieu bao diem


- pronunciation ( mime ) (n) cach phat am, ngu am.
-(to)improve ( situation ):cai thien ,trau doi


-(to)be proud of = tu hao .
- (to) promise: hua.


- to try one,<sub>s best = co gang het suc </sub>


* Checking : Rub out and remember


<b>* / F statements predictions : - Ask Ss to read the</b>
<b>statements and predict they are true or false .</b>


Statements Guess Key


1. Tim was out when his mother


called him .


F
2. Tim,<sub>s mother met his teacher at </sub>


school .


F


3. Tim,<sub>s report is poor .</sub> <sub>F</sub>


4. Tim needs to improve his
Spanish grammar


T
5. Tim promised to try his best in


learning Spanish .


T
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


While - reading :


- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books ,
then read the dialogue to check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to read their results .


- Give feedback :



- Ask Ss to correct false statements .
1. Tim was in the living room / at home
2. his report is excellent


3. He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation .
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front
of class .


- Listen and correct their pronunciation if any .
* Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and


answering the questions .
- Give feedback .


a. She is Tim,<sub>s teacher . </sub>


b. She gave Tim,<sub>s mother his report card . </sub>


c. He worked really hard .


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Copy down
Play game



Work individually


Read their predictions aloud .
Listen and read the dialogue to
check their predictions .


Correct false ones . Read them
aloud .


Practice the dialogue in pairs .
Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions .


Open pairs


- Asks each other: What subjects
do you need to improve ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish
pronunciation .


e. She gave him a dictionary


- Ask them to practice in open pairs .
<b>Post - reading : Survey </b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each
other the question “ What subject do you need to
improve ? “ and they have to write the names and


the subjects that their friends answer :


Name What subject


Lan


………….


History
………..


- Ask Ss who need to improve the same subjects
work in group and discuss how to improve .
Homework :


1. Write the way how to improve the subject that
they are not good at .


2. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and copy .


-Copy down homeworks


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...



<b>Period 27: Unit 5: study habits</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : speak + Litsen</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 18/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their study habits .
- Develop Ss’ speaking skill.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Behavior, cooperation, satisfactory ≠ unsatisfactory, comment., signature.
2. Grammar: Conditional sentence.


<b>III. Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.
<b>IV. Procedure: </b>


<b>1. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>2. Checking up : - Asks Ss retell sme mains subjects at school.</b>
- Some pairs ask and answer about their subjects


<b>S1: How often do we have music ?</b>
<b>S2: We have music 2times aweek.</b>
=> T corrects and give them marks.
<b>III. New lesson :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<b> Warm up : </b>



<b>*Brainstorming</b>


- Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .
* Possible answers :


- Speak English to friends in class
- Watch English TV


- Do grammar exercises
- Read English stories


- Read English newspapers / magazines
- Listen to the English radio program


<b>*Speaking:</b>
<b>Pre - speaking : </b>


Introduce the topic of the speaking .


- Call on some Ss to read the possible answers
above and copy down .


- Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes.
While – speaking :


- Asks Ss work in groups of three or four .in the
tables.


Ask each other about your studies.Use the questions


and words in the boxes to help them.


1. When do you do your homework?


( after school / after dinner / late at night / … )
2. Who helps you with your homework?


( your parents / your brother / your sisters / a friend
…)


…..


- Asks Ss do exercises in the text books in page 48 .
- T gets feedback.


Call some pairs to talk loudly.


Work in groups to play games .


Read all the ways of improving
English .


Copy in their notebooks .


Listen and read the model , then
copy


Work in pairs


Practice in front of class.


Work individually .
Read their writings


- Ss works in pairs .


- copy down some keys if


<b>How to improve </b>
<b>your English ?</b>


<b>How to improve </b>
<b>your English ?</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

- Others listening.
* Model :


<i><b>Lan said she did her homework after dinner</b></i>
<i><b> He / she said ………</b></i>


- Call on some pairs to read the model
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
- Correct mistakes if any .


<b>Post - speaking : </b>


- Ask Ss to write with information above .
Eg : Lan ,<sub>s elder brother helps him with his </sub>



homework .


- Call on some Ss to read their writings .
<b>*B/ Listening: </b>


<b> Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening </b>
and some new words :


Pre – teach vocabulary :


- behavior (n) = cach ung xu, hanh vi. (trans..)
- participant (n) = nguoi tham gia, su tham gia.
- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (adj)


thoa mai, hai long, toai nguyen > < ko thoa mai,…
- cooperation (n) = su hop tac


- attendance (n) = su du, so nguoi co mat,


- (to)appreciate = danh gia cao ,cam kich, hieu ro
gia tri.


<b>While - listening :</b>
1. Listen :


- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their
prediction .


- Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback .
1. 87 days present



2. 5 days absent


3. participation : Spanish pronunciation
4. Listening : Comprehension


5. Speaking : A


6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B
<b>Comprehension questions : </b>


- Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,<sub>s </sub>


report card .


1. Who are Nga,<sub>s parents ?</sub>


2. What is Nga,<sub>s teacher</sub>,<sub>s name ? </sub>


3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?
4. What are the comments ?


5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B


necessary.


- Write with these
informations


- Some pairs to practise.



Retell the main poi Retell
individually .


Listen and copy .


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually .


Copy down .
Play game


Predict and compare with their
partners .


Report their predictions .


Listen to the tape and check their
predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

CD ?


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs
to answer the questions .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .


<b>Post - listening : </b>
<b> ** </b>Survey:



Questions You your


partner
1. When do you do your


homework ?


2. Who helps you with your
homework?


3. How much time do you spend
on Maths / English / History /
Literature ?


4. Which subject do you need to
improve ?


5. What do you do to improve
your English?


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners
questions and taking notes of the answers .


- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what
they have known about their partners,<sub> study . </sub>


- Correct mistakes if any .
<b>Consolidation: </b>



-Retell the mains points of this lesson .( Some Ss to
retell)


Homework :


1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they
have found out .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Work in pairs tom practice asking
and answering the questions .


Practice asking and answering the
questions and report their survey .
- Do exercises LF 1 , Works in


pairs.


- Do EX 2 (52) . Work in groups of
tables.




-Copy down homeworks..


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b>Period 28: Unit 5: study habits</b>




<b>Lesson 3 : Read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 25/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text and get specific information ..
- They can do all exercises language focus 3,4 in the textbooks (52).


<b>II. language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: come across, mother tongue, revise, meaning, highlight……
2. Grammar: simple present.


<b>III.Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , cassette , chalks, lesson plans,posters….
<b>IV. Procedure : </b>


<b>1. Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>2. Checking up : - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialoguge .</b>
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>T’ activities</b> <b>Ss’ activities</b>


<b>Warm up : * Chatting </b>
1. Do you like English ?



2. How many new words do you try to learn a day ?
3. What do you do when you read a new words ?
4. How do you learn / remember new words ?
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .


- Correct and lead in the new lesson .


<b>Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the reading </b>
passage and some new words .


Pre- teach vocabulary :


-(a) Mother tongue ( example ): tiếng mẹ đẻ
-(to )underline ( example ): gạch dới, gạch chân.
- (to) highlight ( example ):làm nổi bật.


-( to) come across ( synonym ) = Run in to : gặp tình
cờ.


- (to) stick ( mime ): dán , dÝnh , cµi…
* Checking : * Slap the board
<b>While - reading : </b>


Brainstorming


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways
how a language learner can learn new words .
* Possible answers :



- Learn by heart


- Translate it into mother tongue


- Write each word on one piece of paper and put it
into the pocket to learn whenever


Practice asking and answering the
question


Listen and copy .


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Copy down .
Play games


Work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

- Learn through example sentences


- Write it on small piece of paper and stick
everywhere in the house …….


<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of the lesson .
Homework :



1. Write the ways of learning words that you think
are the best for you .


2. Prepare the next lesson( True / False + Answer)


Work individually
Copy down homeworks


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 29: Unit 5: study habits</b>



<b>Lesson 4 : Read (Continue</b>

<b>)</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 25/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text and get specific information ..
- They can do all exercises language focus 3,4 in the textbooks (52).


<b>II. language contents: </b>


3. Vocabulary: come across, mother tongue, revise, meaning, highlight……
4. Grammar: simple present.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>1. Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>2. Checking up : - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialoguge .</b>
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


<b>3. New lesson</b>:


<b>T’ activities</b> <b>Ss’ activities</b>


<b>Warm up </b>


* Checking the old lesson : Vocabulay, reading
<b>Practice</b>


1. True / False statements


- Ask Ss to read the statements , then read the text
and decide which is true and which is false .
( Page 50 )


- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback
a. F b. T c . F d . T


* Reading :


- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud .
2. Comprehension questions


- Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some Pairs to practice asking and


answering the questions


- Give feedback


a. No . They learn words in different ways .


b. Because they help them to remember the use of
new words .


c. They write examples , put the words and their
meanings on stickers , underline or highlight them .
d. They may think they can not do so . Instead , they
learn only important words .


e. Revision is necessary in learning words .
f. Learners should try different ways of learning
words t find out what is the best .


<b>Post - reading : * Survey </b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups to interview one another
and tick the ways they have used to learn new words


<b>Ways of learning words </b> <b>Lan Hoa ...</b>
1. Make a list of words , their


meanings and learn them by
heart .


2. Write sample sentences with


new words


3. Stick new words somewhere
in the house .


4. Underline or highlight the
words .


- Work in groups : Read the text
and decide decide which is true
and which is false


- Present their answers
Read the text aloud .
Work in pairs


Practice asking and answering the
question


Listen and copy .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

5. Read stories in English .
6. Learn words through songs .


- Call on Ss to report about their groups .


Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words ….
<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of the lesson .


Homework :


1. Write the ways of learning words that you think
are the best for you .


2. Prepare the next lesson .


Report and copy the answers .
Work individually


Copy down homeworks


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 30: Unit 5: study habits</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : Write</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 25/10/2011</i>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know the format of a friendly letter and practice
writing a letter to a friend .


<b>II. Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , chalks , boards,lesson plan, posters ….


<b>III. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: heading, opening, closing, lunar new year.
2. Grammar: request in repoted speech.


<b>IV. Procedure :</b>


<b>1. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance </b>


<b>2. Checking up: -Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to retell the new words and meaning of these </b>
words. Teacher corrects and give them marks.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


Warm up : Chatting


1. Have you ever written to someone ?
2. To whom do you usually write ?
3. What do you often write about ?
- Lead in new lesson .


Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss .


Pre – teach vocabulary :


Play games



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

- Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation )Tet am
lich.


- Enjoyable (adj ) = vui thu , thich thu, vui thich
- (to) celebrate = ki niem , to chuc ki niem.
-> celebration (n) le ki niem.


- Mid-Autumn Festival(n) Tet trung thu.
- Moon festival( n) : le hoi mung trang
* Checking : Rub out and remember
Ordering:


- Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct
order.


a. Opening d. Body of the letter
b. Closing e. Signature


c. The date f . Writer,<sub>s address .</sub>


- Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e
- Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order .
<b> Labeling </b>


- Ask Ss to label each section with the correct
letter . Comprehension questions


- Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions
a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ?



b. What are there in the heading ?
c. What is the main part of the letter ?
d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ?
e. What subject is Hoa good at ?


f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New
Year Festival ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering in front of class .


<b>While - writing : </b>


- Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a
letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using
the given information .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in
front of class .


* Suggested letter :
<i>15 Quang Trung street </i>
<i>Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 </i>
<i>Dear Donna </i>


<i>Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had </i>
<i>an interesting Mother,<sub>s Day .</sub></i>


<i>We have received our second semester report last </i>
<i>month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics </i>


<i>and Math but my English and History results were </i>


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Copy down .
Play games .


Do the exercise individually .


Read and check .


Label each section with the
correct letter .


Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions .


Imagine and write the a letter
individually .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<i>poor . My teacher advises me to improve English </i>
<i>and History . I think I have to study harder next </i>
<i>school year . </i>


<i>In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid </i>
<i>Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival </i>
<i>in Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long</i>
<i>Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going </i>
<i>to stay ther with them until the festival comes . I will</i>


<i>send you a postcard from there . </i>


<i>Write soon and tell me all your news . </i>
<i>Best </i>


<i>Lan , </i>


Post - writing : ***Correction


- Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct
the mistakes .


<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson .
<b>Homeworks : </b>


1. Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her
about your second semester report and about
Summer holiday .


2. Learn by heart vocabulary and mains
structure grammar.


3. Redo all exercises of language focus .
4. Prepare for next lesson.


Read their letters aloud .
Copy down .



- Retell the mains points of this
lesson.


- Copy dowm homeworks


<b>V. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>Week 11</b>



<b>Period 31: Unit 5: study habits</b>



<b>Lesson 6 : language focus</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 2/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to use adverb of manner, commands, </b>
requests and advice in reported speech.


<b>2. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , lesson plan, posters.</b>
<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Retelling


- Ask Ss to write the adverbs of manner:
- Good - bad - quick.


- Soft - fast - early.
- Hard - beautiful - careful.


 <b>Revision. </b>


<b>A. Adverbs of manner: </b>


? Ask Ss to repeat the use, form of adverbs of
manner.


- T listens and emphazises.
<b>B. Should. </b>


? ask Ss to repeat the use, form of Should.
- T listens and emphazises.


<b>Modal : Should </b>


- Ask Ss to look at Mr Hao,<sub>s house and answer some </sub>


questions


a. Is his house new ?
b. Is the wall discolored ?
c. How is the door ?


d. Is there grass in his garden ?
e. Should Mr Hao repair the roof ?
Suggested answers :



a. No , it isn,<sub>t b. Yes , it is c. It is broken </sub>


d. Yes. There is lots of grass in his garden.
e. Yes, he should .


-> Explain the modal “ Should “
+ Form : S + Should + infinitive
+ Use : give advice


+ Meaning : nen ( lam gi )


<i>Exercise 2 / 52 </i>


Give Ss the question “ What should he do with his
house ?


 mend ? / paint ? / replant ? / cut ? / repair ?
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the verbs to advise Mr


- Ss write;


- well - badly - quikly.
- softly - fast - early.
- hard - beautifully
- carefully.


- Ss repeat:


* Use : To express actions
happened and finished in the


past.


* Form: Adj + ly = Adv.
- Ss repeat:


* Use: To express advice.
* Form: ( + ) S + should + V.
( - ) S + shouldn’t + V.
( ? ) Should + S + V ?


- Ss listen carefully and
copy the form.


- Do exercise;


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

Hao what to do .


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the question “ What should he do with his house ? “
- Give feedback .


a. Mr Hao should repair the roof .
b…………...paint the house
c. ………...cut the grass .
d. ………...replant the tree
e. ………….mend the door


<b>Language focus </b>


<b>1. Complete the dialoguge: - T hangs a poster</b>


– Asks Ss to do exercises in pairs .


2. Look at the picture and say what he
<b>should do</b>


<b>Eg: Mr. Hao should repair the roof.</b>


 <b>Requests in reported speech. </b>


Let Ss roplay of Tim, Tim’s mother and miss
Jackson to request and report request.


 Form: S + asked/ told + O + to V.
 <b>Advice in reported speech.</b>


- Let Ss roplay of Tim, Tim’s mother and miss
Jackson to give advice and report advice.
 form: S + said + Clause ( should).


- T checks after Ss finish.
<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the mains points of this lesson .
<b> Homework : </b>


1. Write something about your partners,<sub> study habits</sub>


Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very hard and
always get good grades . she usually does her



homework after school


Practice asking and answering
the questions and report their
survey .


- Do exercises LF 1 ,
Works in pairs.


- Do EX 2 (52) . Work in groups
of tables.


<i><b>**</b></i>



<i> <b>Ex </b> (: 4 / 53) </i>


- Ask Ss to work with their
partners .


- Call on some Ss to practice in
pairs and correct pronunciation .
- Give feedback


a. Miss Jackson said you should
spend more time on Spanish
pronunciation .


b. Miss Jackson said you should
practice speaking Spanish every


day .


c . Miss Jackson said you should
listen to Spanish conversation on
TV .


d. Miss Jackson you should
practice reading aloud passage in
Spanish .


e. Miss Jackson said you should
use this dictionary to find out how
to pronounce Spanish words .


Copy down.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 32: Unit 6: the young pioneers club</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<i>Preparing Date : 2/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue about the young pioneers .Ss


will be able to use the simple present tense with future meaning.


<b>2. Teaching aids : Textbook , 5 cards for drill , Cassette, posters, lesson plan.</b>
<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : * Chatting


Ask Ss some questions about their activities and their
summer holidays .


1. What do you often do on your summer holiday ?
2. Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth
Organization ?


3. Are there any activity programs for the summer ?
4. Do you take part in them ?


5. What activity do you like most ?


Presentation : Introduce the topic of the lesson and some
new words to Ss .


. Pre – teach vocabulary :


-( to ) enroll ( translation ) :dang ki vao., ghi danh.
- Answer application form ( visual )


- Out door activities : Games that you play in the open air


rather than in a building or a house such as : football , tennis
….


- Hobby (n) (Revision)
- Acting (n) (revision)


* Checking :* Rub out and remember
Listen and read the dialogue :


- Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight . She wants
to enroll in the activities for the summer . “


- Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time.
- Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,<sub>s particulars . </sub>


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class.
- Give feedback


* Name : Pham Thi Nga


* Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street
* Phone number : Not available
* Date of birth : April 22 , 1989
* Sex : Female


* Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting
- Ask Ss some questions :


+ What is her name ?



Chatting
( whole class )


Listen and repeat in
chorus and individually ,
then copy .


Play game


Listen to the tape
Read the dialogue
Work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

+ What does she live ?
+ When was she born ?
+ What are her hobbies ?


- Call on some Ss to answer the questions .
. Concept checking


- What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing
- What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting


- What do you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ -> gerund
- What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing


- When do we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some verbs : like ,
love , enjoy , hate , mind .


* Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund


* Drill : word cue drill


- Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them :
a. play soccer / volley ball


b. watch TV / listen to music
c. read books / do homework


d. Chat with friends / do the housework
e. Cook meal / decorate the house .
=> What are your hobbies ?


I like / love playing soccer and volleyball .
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering
- Correct mistakes if any .


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
<b>Production * Survey </b>


- Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups of three
to ask their friends and tick on the chart .


Do you like name / Nam Mai
love like don,<sub>t</sub>


hate like


love like don,<sub>t</sub>


hate like


- play soccer


- washing up
- cooking meals
- performing music
- gathering broken
glasses


- watching TV
- play badminton


- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends,
hobbies .


<b>Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
Homework :


Answer the questions
( whole class )


Listen and copy the form
. Then practice


Practice reading the
dialogue in pairs .
Work in groups


-Ss Retell the main


points.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

1. Write about their friend,<sub>s hobbies . </sub>


- Learn vocabulary, main structure Grammar by heart
2. Prepare the next lesson .


homeworks.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 33: Unit 6: the young pioneers club</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>1. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask for favors and respond to favors . offer and
respond to assistance and complete a song for details.


<b>2. Teaching aids : Cut out shark , cut out girl / boy , textbook , lesson plan,posters.</b>


<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>



<b>A. SPEAK</b>


<b>Warm up : * Shark,<sub> s attack </sub></b>


- Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from card
- Draw some steps , then stick the cut out girl / boy
on the top of the steps , the sharks in the sea .
- Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor


<b>Presentation </b>


- Ask Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR
+ What do you say to ask for a favor ?
Can you help me ?


Could you do me a favor ?
Can / Could you ………..?
+ When do you ask for favor ?
Need some help


+ How do you say to respond to favor ?
Certainly / Of course / sure


No problem


+ What does the receptionist say ?
May I help you ?


+ What is for ?



For offering assistance


+ another way to offer assistance ?


Do you need any help ? / Let me help you .
+ How do you say to respond to assistance ?
Yes . No , thank you .


- Ask Ss to copy down the following phrases
<b>Asking for favor</b> <b>Responding for favor</b>
* Can / Could you


help me please ?
* Could you do
me a favor ?
* I need a favor
* Can / could
you ..?


* Certainly / of course / sure
* No problem


* What can I do for you ?
* How can I help you ?
* I am sorry . I am really
busy


<b>Offering </b>
<b>assistance </b>



<b>Responding to assistance </b>
* May I help you ? * Yes / No . Thank you


Play game in two teams


Listen and practice asking and
answering the questions


-Work in pairs.
Listen and copy
-Work individually


- Practice in pairs


- Copy down on their notebooks
-Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

* Do you need any
help ?


* Let me help
you .


* Yes . That is very kind of
you .


* No . thank you . I am fine .
I can manage .
- Ask Ss to repeat chorally and then individually all
the phrases in the chart .



Practice :
<b>A. Speaking: </b>


* Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct pronunciation if any .


* Use the appropriate phrases to make similar
dialogues about some of the following situations
with a partner.


- Have Ss work in pairs .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback


Production : Situation : A receptionist wants to
help a tourist who needs to go to the nearest bank
<b>Receptionist : ………?</b>


<b>Tourist : yes . Can you ………..?</b>


<b>Receptionist : Sure . Turn right when you get out of</b>
the hotel . Turn left at the first corner .


………... your right .
<b>Tourist :………</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the dialogue and


move around the class and help Ss .


- Call on some Ss to practice the dialogue in front of
the class .


<b>B. LISTEN</b>


Let Ss listen to the song for fun


Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words to Ss .


*Pre – teach vocabulary


- to unite = doan ket , hop nhat , ket hop ( trans)
- peace (n) > < war (n)


- (to) shout out (st) : noi to (action)
- hold hand (v) : nam tay. (action)


- … From place to place …: tu noi nay den noi
khac…


+ Land: (revision)
+ World: (revision)
+ South: (revision)
+ North: (revision)


Work in pairs



- Make similar dialogues.
Work in pairs


Closed pairs


- Move around the class and to
make the dialogues.


Practice the dialogues in front of
class


Listen and copy .
Listen to a song


Listen and copy down
Work in groups to guess the
missing words in the song .
Report their predictions.


Listen to the tape and check
their predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b>* Guess the missing words </b>


- Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the
song


- Get them to share with their partners and report
their predictions .Then write them on the board .
While - listening :



- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check their
predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their results
- Give feedback


<i>Children of our land <b>unite </b></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s sing for </sub><b><sub>peace ,</sub></b></i>


<i>Let,<sub>s sing for</sub><b><sub> right</sub></b><sub> .</sub></i>


<i>Let,<sub>s sing for the </sub><b><sub>love</sub></b><sub> between </sub><b><sub>north</sub></b><sub> and </sub><b><sub>south</sub></b><sub> , </sub></i>


<i>Oh, children <b>of </b>our land , unite .</i>
<i>Children of the <b>world</b> hold hands .</i>


<i>Let,<sub>s </sub><b><sub>show</sub></b><sub> our love from </sub><b><sub>place </sub></b><sub>to place .</sub></i>


<i>Let,<sub>s shout </sub><b><sub>out</sub></b><sub> loud ,</sub></i>


<i>Let,<sub>s make a </sub><b><sub>stand</sub></b><sub> ,</sub></i>


<i>Oh , children of the <b>world </b>, hold hands . </i>


-Turn on the tape once more to check the results
again .


Post - listening :



- Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the
song


+ Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally .


- Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a song.
<b>Consolidations: </b>


-Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>Homework : </b>


1. Learn by heart the expressions to offer assistance
and favor and how to respond them .


2. Write the dialogue between you and a tourist who
lost money .


- Prepare for next lesson.


Listen and check the results
again .


Learn how to sing


Listen and copy . Work in
groups of four.


- Some Ss of each group to sing
a song.



- Copy down new
Grammar Structure .
-Work individually.


Give example.


Practice the dialogues in front of
class .


Ss copy down the homework.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Week 12</b>



<b>Period 34: Unit 6: the young pioneers club</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 8/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about HCM Communist
Youth Union.


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>



textbooks , cardboards, posters.


<b>3. Procedure</b>:


<b>Teacher</b> <b>Students</b>


<b>I/WARMER: (5’)</b>


<i> Chatting </i>
- Do you enjoy singing ?


- Do you know the songs of the Ho Chi Minh
Young Pioneer and Young organization ?
- Do you take part in the summer activities in
your neighborhood ? What are they ?


- Do you know any Young or Youth
organizations in other countries ?


T-ss
- Ss answer


<b>II/ PRE-READING:(13’)</b>
*Pre-teach:


- (to) encourage : khuyến khích (explain.)
- citizenship: quyền công dân (translation)
- (to) establish : thiết lập (synonym: give the
synonym of to start, to create an organization).


- fitness : sự khỏe mạnh (explanation)
- officially: chính thức


- movements: phong trào
- Campaign: chiến dịch.


- public awareness : nâng cao nhận thức công
chúng


- personality: nhân cách
- principle: nguyên tắc


- guidelines : đường lối chỉ đạo


- HCM Communist Youth Union: Hội Liên
hiệp Thanh niên Cộng sản Hồ Chí Minh


- Vietnam Communist Youth Union. : Đoàn
Thanh niên Cộng sản Việt Nam.


- Young Pioneers Organization: tổ chức thiếu
niên tiền phong


-Vietnam Youth Federation: Liên đoàn Thanh
niên Việt Nam:


- VN students Union: hội liên hiệpsinh
viênVN:


* Checking vocab: Rub out and remember


* T / F Statements Prediction


1. HCM Communist Youth Union is an


-SS listen and repeat chorally
/ individually


-T checks SS the stressing
and the meaning of the
word .


-SS copy down.


- Rewrite


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

Organization for Vietnamese youth from 16 to 30
years of age


2. The Union was founded on June 26 ,1931.


3. In December 1976 the Youth Union was
officially named as it is called today.


4. The Youth Union’s activities aim to help the
young develop their public awareness.


5. Ever since the Union was founded, its aims and
principles, established by President Nguyen Thi
Binh



- collect Ss’ prediction


- guess which is true (T),
which is false (F).


- give prediction
<b>III-WHILE-READING (15’)</b>


Ask ss to read the text to check the prediction
Give feedback


*<i><b>Checking</b></i> :


Guess Answer Correction
1.


2.
3.
4.
5.


T
F
T
T
F


March26 ,1931
Ho Chi Minh
 <i><b>Comprehension questions </b></i>



Ask ss to read the text again to answer the
questions on P 57


Ask some pairs to practice before the class.
<i><b>Answer keys</b></i>


a) From 15 to 30 years of age can join the Youth
Union.


b) The Youth Union was founded on March 26
1931.


c) The complete name of the Youth Union is “Ho
Chi Minh Communist Youth Union.”


d) - Helping the Handicapped.
- Cleaning the Environment.
- Green Summer Volunteers
Campaign.


- And others similar movements.


e) These activities aim to help the young develop
their public awareness and form their personality.
f) Ho Chi Minh established the guidelines for the
Vietnamese youth


<b>IV /POST-READING : (10’) </b>



<b>Fill In The Missing information</b>
Keys


- read the passage on page
57 and check if their
prediction is correct or not.
- correct false statements.


Pair work:


open pairs /closed pairs
-answer the questions (P 57).


- correct their answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

a) Viet Nam.
b) December 1976


c) their public awareness and form their
personality.


d) the guidelines


<b>V/HOMEWORK : (2’)</b>


-Read the text and write the answer on your
notebooks.


-Prepare:Unit 6 :write



missing information in
Ex.1-p.57.


- corrects.
.


-SS copy down


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 35: Unit 6: the young pioneers club</b>



<b>Lesson 4 : write</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 8/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter about a future plan using <i><b>be going to</b></i><b> . </b>


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>Text book , chalk , board, lesson plan.
<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>



*Warm up : Revision of the structure Be going
<b>to </b>


- Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a
future plan . Get Ss to make the sentence :


“ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin
with a letter from A to Z :


Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation .
S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle
S2 : I am going to clean the floor .
S3 : I am going to dust the furniture ..


Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss .


<b>** Pre – teach vocabulary : </b>
- to raise fund ( translation )
- a bank ( visual )


Play game


Listen and copy


Listen and repeat chorally and
individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

- natural resources : coal oil , iron .. under the
ground or the sea .



<b>* Reading the notice </b>


- Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y
members of the school “


- Ask some questions to check their understanding
a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in
the recycling program ?


b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ?
c. What other programs can members of the Y and
Y participate in ?


- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Give feedback and ask them to practice in open
pairs .


<b>* Complete the letter </b>


- Ask some questions to set the scene :
- Who writes the letter ? ( Nga )


- To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh )
- Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes )


- What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes
about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is
going to participate )



- Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the
letter .


- Give feedback :1. community 2.recycling 3.collect
4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn
8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping
- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and
correct mistakes if any .


<b>* Reading the dialogue :Set the scene“Hoa talks to </b>
her aunt about the Y and Y Green Group, about the
activities that she is going to do .”


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her
aunt .


* Checking : Some questions :
a. Why does Hoa look happy ?


b. What is she going to do in the environment
month ?


c.What are they doing to earn money for their
school


Y & Y ?


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in
front of the class .



*While - writing :


Read the notice and answer the
questions


Practice asking and answering the
questions in pairs


Listen and answer
( the whole )


Work in pairs to complete the
letter .


Read the complete letter .
Listen and copy .


Practice asking and answering the
questions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents .
- Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter
on poster . Move around the class and help then if
they are necessary .


*Post - writing :


- Choose four letters from 4 group and stick them on
the board. Get the whole class to read the 4 letters
and correct them .



- Give feedback : * Suggested letter
Dear Mom and Dad ,


I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in
the Y & Y Green Group of my school .


The green Group is holding an environment month
plan . We are going to clean the lakes,<sub>banks on </sub>


weekends . We are also going to plant trees and
flowers in the parks and water them every afternoon
after class . We are planting young trees and plants
to sell to other schools . I hope that we can bring
more green to the city and earn some money for the
school Y&Y . The program is very interesting and
useful , is not it ?


I am still in a very good health . I will tell you more
about the group activities later .


With love ,
Hoa .


*Homeworks:


Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her
parents in their notebooks .


Read the suggested letter aloud



Listen and copy .


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 36: Unit 6: the young pioneers club</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : language focus</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 8/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know or revise the present and its


future meaning, gerunds and model verbs: “ may, might. Can, could “ to further practive making
sentence with the prompt.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>Warm up : Listen to a song </b>
- Let Ss listen to the song for fun


<b>Grammar:</b>



<b>Gerund: ( danh dong tu)</b>




+ Một số động từ thờng đứng trớc danh động từ:
- (to) finish - (to)delay
- (to) prevent(ngăn cản) - (to)enjoy
- (to) avoid(tránh) - (to) try
- (to) deny( chối) - (to)like


- (to)dislike = don’t like = doesn’t like <b>…</b>


<b>+</b> Modal verbs: May / can / could .


<b>* May</b>: Dùng để chỉ sự cho phép .
eg: May I use your phone?


May I go out ?


 May còn dùng để diễn tả ý đề nghị giúp ngời
khác làm gì. Cách dùng này chỉ phép lịch sự
của ngời nói.


eg: May I help you?


May I carry the box for you ?


- Yes. That’s very kind of you.


<b>* Can / Could</b> : cã thÓ


- Thờng dùng để diễn tả khả năng, nng lc cú th
lm gỡ.



- <b>could </b>là quá khứ cña <b>can.</b>


eg: He can play piano.
Can you swim ?


He can lift heavy stone (có thể nhấc hịn đá nặng).


 Ngồi ra can / could cịn có thể dùng đề nghị ai
giúp đỡ mình làm việc gì.( Asking for favors )
eg: Could you help me , please ?


- Could you do me a favor?


- Can you lift the box for me, please ?


<b>**. </b>

<b>Present tense with future meaning:</b>


=> We use simple present tense to express an action
that happens in the future .


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the
Y&Y activity by using the cues in the books.


<b>* Language focus 2:</b>


<b>+ Gerunds: (danh dong tu) We use the _ing form </b>
as a noun called a gerund.


+ The gerund as an uncountable noun in general
statements.



eg: Dancing is fun.


Listen to a song


Copy down new Grammar
Structure . Listen and repeat
chorally , individually


Copy down


Listen carefully


Repeat the uses of the “ Asking for
favors / offering assistance and how
to respond “


Work in pairs to give the example


Practice asking and answering to
draw the form


Copy down .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

+ The gerund as an uncountablenoun with SOME,
ANY , NO , A LOT OF, ALITTLE , ENOUGH.
eg: I did some shopping this morning . …


*Look at the table . Talk about our friends’ hobbies:
A: Ba loves playing soccer , but he doesn’t like


washing up.


B: Lan doesn’t like playing soccer and she doesn’t
like washing up ,either.


…..


* Copy the table in to your exercise book.Then
complete it with information about you . Next ask
and answer questions with your partner.:


<i>A - Do you like playing soccer ? </i>
<i>B - No. I hate it . What about you ?.</i>
<i>C- Yes. I love playing soccer. </i>
<i>D - <b>…</b></i>


<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>Homework : </b>


1. Copy down the completed song .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


- Listen and copy .


--Work individually.
Give example.



- Look at the table and talk
about their friends’ hobbies.
- Work in pairs .


- Copy the table in to the notebook.
-Then ask and answer the questions
with your partner .


Some Ss retell the main points of
this lesson.


-Copy down homeworks.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Week 13</b>



<b>Period 37: consolidation</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 15/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from


unit 3 to unit 6 .



<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>Text book , chalk , board, lesson plan, posters.
<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


Warm up : Brainstorming
*Possible answers :


- Clean up the streets
- Help elderly people
- Take part in sports


- Help handicappied / street children


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

- Collect and empty garbage …..
** Presentation :


<b> Present tense with future meaning </b>
Pre – teach vocabulary


- a ret home : a place where old or sick people are
cared for


- an orphanage : a place where children without
parents live


- a stadium ( picture )


* Checking : Rub out and remember



<b> Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan </b>
and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization .
They are talking about the summer activity
program”


Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ?
Mai : at Dong Xuan Market .


Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………?
Mai : On January 9


Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..?
Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai
to practice the dialogue .


- Give feedback
*Keys:


1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage
4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at
c. Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to
check their understanding


a. When do we “ where “ ?
b. When do we use “ when “ ?
c. When do we use “ what time “ ?
d. Is the date at present or in the future ?
e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ?



=> We use simple present tense to express an action
that happens in the future .


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the
Y&Y activity by using the following cues


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
- Give feedback


Gerunds :


<b>* Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving </b>
<b>* Survey : </b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their


Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually


Copy down
Play game
Listen carefully


Work in pairs to practice the
dialogue


Practice asking and answering
to draw the form



Copy down .


Practice asking and answering
the questions about the Y&Y
activity .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

friends and stick on the chart .


- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends,


hobbies .


Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like
cooking and especially hate washing dishes . ..
<b>Modals : may , can , could </b>


- Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering


assistance , asking for favors and how to respond .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front
of the class .


- Give feedback


a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ?
B : Can you take me across the road ?


C : Could you help me with this math problem ?
D : Can you water the flowers in the garden?


b / A : May I help you ?


A : Do you need any help ?
B : Let me help you .


A : Yes . That is very kind of you .


- Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the
class .


<b>* Consolidation: </b>


-Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>*Homework : </b>


1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Work in groups of three or four
Report their results .


Repeat the uses of the “ Asking
for favors / offering assistance
and how to respond “


Practice speaking the dialogue
Listen and copy .


Ss copy down.



<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 38: test (45 </b>

<b>minutes) – No 2</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 15/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson, T will check the students’ knowledge about


vocabularies, grammar, pronunciation, ….. that they learnt from Unit 3 to Unit 6


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>chalk , board, lesson plan.
<b>3. Procedure:</b>


I. Khoanh trịn t có ph n phát âm khác v i các t còn l i (1 i m):ừ ầ ớ ừ ạ đ ể
1. A. played B. visited C. needed D. acted


2. A. recycle B. sky C. why D. century


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

4. A. meal B. ahead C. reading D. please
<b>II. khoanh tròn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau (3 điểm):</b>
1. He is always interested ... his family.(on / in / at / for ).


2. Vietnamese’s natural ... are oil, coal and gas. (resources /material /Earth /
mine).



3. Lan is a good student. Her teacher is very ... of her.(careful / important / proud
/ fair ).


4. I was born in Viet Nam; Vietnamese is my ... .( mother tongue / first language
/ foreign language / language).


5. She works very ... .( hardly / careful / hard / slow ).
6. Could you . . . me favor, please? (help / get / make / do).
7. . . ….. sing for peace. (Let’s / Let / Letting / Let’s us).


8. You have to try your . . . to improve some sounds. (all / good / best / with).
9. I was born . . . January 1st<sub>, 1998. (at / to / in / on).</sub>


10. My gandmother used to . . . on a farm when she was young. (to live / am living /
live / living).


III. Vi t d ng úng c a các ế ạ đ ủ động t sau thì quá kh (1 i m):ừ ở ứ đ ể


1. ride ……. 2. take ……. 3.eat ….… 4.visit ……
5.do ..…... 6.fly ……. 7.live .…… 8.stay ……
9. write ……. 10. put


<b>IV. Tìm lỗi sai trong các câu sau (1 điểm):</b>
1. I enjoy listen to music on Sundays.


2. Tim’s teacher asked him improve his Spanish pronunciation.
3. You are sick you should to go to the doctor.


4. She runs very fastly.



<b>V. Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi (2 điểm): </b>
<i>Nam is Ba’s best friend. He lived in Thanh Hoa city with his mother, father and two sisters</i>
<i>last year. But now they are in the same class. In the morning, they have to walk to school.</i>
<i>Nam is very intelligent, sociable and helpful. He always helps Ba do his homework. Nam</i>
<i>enjoys learning English and he speaks English very well. He has his own room upstairs and</i>
<i>they often study there in the evening. His family is going to live in Ha Noi next year and they</i>
<i>have to say goodbye. Ba is very sad and so is Nam.</i>


1. Where did Nam live last year ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

2. How does Nam speak English ?


………..
3. Are Ba and Nam in the same class?


………..
4. What is Nam like?


………..
VI. Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh (2 điểm):


1. My father / used / live / a farm.


………..
2. Phong/ speak/ English/ well.


………..
3. She / used / look after / children / the past.


……….


4. I / told / tiger / I / left / wisdom / home.


……….


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Period 39: correcting the test (45 </b>

<b>minutes) – No 2</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 15/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson, T will check the students’ knowledge about


vocabularies, grammar, pronunciation, ….. that they learnt from Unit 3 to Unit 6


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>chalk , board, lesson plan.
<b>3. Procedure: </b>


<b>I. (1point) - 0.25 for each correct sentence</b>


<b>1 - a ; 2 - d; 3- d ; 4 - B</b>


<b>II. (3 points) - 0.3 for each correct sentence</b>
1- in


2 - resources


3- proud


4- mother tongue
5- hard


6- do
7- Let’s
8-best
9-on
10-live
<b>III. (1 điểm): -0.1 for each correct verbs.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

2- took
3- eate
4-visited
5-did


7-lived
8-stayed
9-wrote
10-put
<i><b>IV. </b>(1 điểm): 0.25 for each mistake.</i>


1: listen -> listening 3: to go -> go
2: improve -> to improve 4: fastly -> fast


<b>V. (2 điểm): - 0.5 for each correct sentence </b>
1. He lived in Thanh Hoa city.


2. He speaks English very well.


3. Yes, they are.


4. He is very intelligent, sociable and helpful.
<b>VI. (2 điểm): - 0.5 for each correct sentence </b>


1. My father used to live on a farm.
2. Phong speaks/ can speak English well.


3. She used to look after her children in the past.
4. I told the tiger (that) I left the wisdom at home.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...

<b>Week 14</b>



<b>Period 40: Unit 7: My neighborhood</b>



<b>Lesson 1 : getting started + Listen and read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 20/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson . Ss will be able to know more about Na,s new


neighbor.


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>Textbook , cassette , boards , chalk ..
<b>3. Procedure:</b>



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


*Warm up : Getting started


- Ask Ss to match the names of places with the
suitable pictures


- Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss know
exactly what they mean


* Answers :


a. grocery store b. stadium
c. wet market d. drug store
e. hairdresser,<sub>s f. swimming pool </sub>


*Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


+ Pre – teach vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

- close by (adv) : a short distance
- to serve : give sb food or drink
- a pancake : banh ran


- tasty (a) = delicious (a)


* Checking vocabulary : What and where
<b>Guiding questions : </b>



- Set the scene “ Nam and Na are talking about the
place where they live . But Na is new there . “
<b>Questions : </b>


a. How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ?
b. Where does Na want to go ?


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and predict the answers
and call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .


While - reading :


* Ask Ss to read silently the dialogue between Nam
and Na then ask them if their answers are correct or
not .


- Give feedback :


a. He has lived there for 10 years .
b. Na wants to go to a restaurant .


* Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 / 64 individually ,
then compare with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback : a. new b. last week c. tired
d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes
* Answers given :



- Give Ss some answers and ask them to make
questions.


a. Nam has lived here for 10 years .
b. Yes. my mother is too tired to cook .
c. The restaurant serves Hue food .
d. Hue food is very good.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and
answering


<b>=> </b><i><b>Questions </b></i>


a. How long has Nam lived here ?
b. Is Na,<sub>s mother tired ? </sub>


c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ?
d. What is the food like ?


** Post - reading : Write


- Ask Ss to write a passage about their


neighborhood by answering the following questions
a. How long have you lived in your neighborhood ?


Listen and copy .


Listen and repeat chorally ,


individually


Copy down
Play game


Listen to the scene and work in
groups to predict the answers to
the guiding questions .


Report their predictions .


Read the dialogue to check their
predictions


- Teacher give them marks if
necessary.


Work individually


Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions
- T give them marks if
necessary.


Open pairs -> closed pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

b. Do you like it ? Why ?


c . Is there a restaurant / post – office / market /
bank / shop in your neighborhood ?



d.How do you do to keep your neighborhood clean ?
- Move around the class and help Ss


- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
- Correct mistakes .


<b>* Consolidation:</b>


-Retell the main points of this leson.
* Homework :


1. Write the complete writing about their
neighborhood .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Demonstrate their writings in
front of class.


Listen and copy down
homeworks.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...



<b>Period 41: Unit 7: My neighborhood</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 23/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk how to send parcels or letters .
<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>Textbooks , chalk , lesson plan, posters.


<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : + Chatting


- Show a letter and ask Ss some questions
+ What is this ?


+ Where can I post it to my friend ?
+ How can I post it ?


+ How much ?


+ Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ?
+ Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?


 Lead in the new lesson .
* Presentation :



<b>+ Pre- teach vocabulary : </b>


- air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air


- surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or
ship …


- Parcel ( n) buu pham buu kien.
- charge (v / n ) : le phi, cuoc phi.
* Checking : Rub out and remember .
<b>* Practice: </b>


Play game
( whole class )


Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually


Copy down
( whole class )
Play game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b> **A/ Speak:</b>


<b>+ Reading comprehension </b>


- Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to
Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .”
- Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in
pairs to compare their answers .



- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the
answers


a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface
mail ? Why ?


b. What is the weight of her parcel ?
c. How much does she pay ?


- Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions
* Answers :


a. Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it
is much cheaper .


b. Her parcel is five kilograms .
c. She pays 19, 200 dongs .
** Practice :


- Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and
practice the dialogue with teacher ( clerk )
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
Correct their pronunciation


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front
of class .


* Further practice :



- Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue
+ Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail


- Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the
clerk in the post office .


- Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue
themselves .


Expected dialogue


<i><b>Clerk : Can I help you ? </b></i>


<i><b>Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom . </b></i>
<i><b>Clerk :Do you want to send it airmail or surface </b></i>
<i><b>mail ? </b></i>


<i><b>Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ? </b></i>
<i><b>Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it is only </b></i>
<i><b>1,200 dongs . </b></i>


<i><b>Mrs Lan : Here you are . </b></i>
<i><b>Clerk : Thank you . </b></i>


<i><b>- Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs </b></i>
<i><b>- Give Ss some situations : </b></i>


Work in pairs


Read the dialogue to fine out the


answers .


Practice asking and answering
the questions .


Practice the dialogue with
teacher .


Work in open pairs
Work in closed pairs .


Practice the dialogues , using
the situations .


( whole class )


Work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g
3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg


4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs .
- Divide class into 3 groups , each prepares a
dialogue


- Call on 2 pairs from each group to practice their
dialogue .


- Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues
and move around class to help Ss .



<b>B/ Listen: Prediction.</b>
*Pre - listening :


- Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood .
She is talking to Nam about what she is going to do
on the weekend .”


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the
answers and fill in the blanks in each advertisement
* While - listening :


+ Listening task :


- Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers
- Give feedback


a. The new comer b. Town Ground
c. English speaking contest d . Culture House
Listening task 2 :


- Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66
- Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which
has no information


- Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends .
- Give feedback


- Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in
the correct boxes : True ? False or No information


+ Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss some questions to check their
understanding of the conversation .
- Turn on the tape again .


a. Does Na like movies ?


b. Why will not she go to see the film “The New
comer “ ?


c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ?
d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ?
e. What time does the match start ?


* Post - Listening :


- Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends
about what Na is going to do this weekend .
- Call on some volunteers from each group to tell


Work in open pairs
Work in closed pairs
Listen and copy .
Listen and copy


Work individually


Work individually



Work in pairs


Listen to the conversation again
and tick in the corrects boxes


Practice asking and answering
the questions.


( whole class )


- Work in pairs


- Answer the questions.
Work in group .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

the whole class about Na .


* Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this
lesson.


* Homework :


1. Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


do this weekend.


- Ss copy down.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>



...
...
...


<b>Period 42: Unit 7: My neighborhood</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 24/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the passage about a new


shopping Mall .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 95 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
*Warm up : Guessing the words


- Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the
words as quickly as possible .


1. a place where you can buy everything


2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit .
3. A place where you can buy books .



4. A place where you can come to eat .


5. A place where you can come to see the movies .
6. A person who comes to the store and buys
something.


=> Lead in the new lesson


** Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the
passage reading and some new words to Ss :
* Pre – teach vocabulary :


- a roof ( picture )


- convenient = thuan loi


- a selection = a process of choosing carefully .
- available = san co de dung , co the de dung
- a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies
theaters are under one roof .


- a resident = cu dan


<i>* Checking vocabulary : What and where </i>
*. Brainstorming :


- Set the scene “ In Nam,<sub>s neighborhood , there is a </sub>


new shopping mall .



- Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the mall .
 Possible answers :


- wide selection of goods


- lower prices / buy many things at the same
time


- have fun or relax while shopping


- <i><b>Lower prices </b></i> wide selection of goods
*While - reading


- Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their
or get more information .


- Give feedback


- Explain the meanings of some phrases rapidly
+ under one roof + shop in comfort


+ take their business + offer a wider selection
+ especially stores + have been concerned
about


* True / False statements


Play game
( whole class )



Listen and copy


Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually


Copy down .
Play games .


Listen and do the task


Read them aloud and copy .


Work individually


Ss look at the statements in the
box and get them to read the text
again and decide which


statements are true , which are

The convenience of the



new shopping mall


The convenience of the



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...

<b>Week 15</b>




<b>Period 43: Unit 7: My neighborhood</b>



<b>Lesson 4 : write</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 29/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a notice .
<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>Textbooks , chalk , lesson plan, posters.


<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


*Warm up : * Chatting
<i>1. Have you ever written a notice ? </i>
<i>2. To whom ? </i>


<i>3. What for ? </i>
<i>4. What type ? </i>


=> Lead in the new lesson .


* Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and the scene “ The residents and store owners on
Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to
discuss the effects of the new mall . “


* Pre- teach vocabulary :



- effects (n) = tac dong , tac dung , hieu qua
- contact (v) = lien lac


- hardware store = dung cu dong dung trong nha
* Guiding questions


a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran
Phu street going to hold a meeting ?


b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ?
c. Where will they hold the meeting ?


- Get Ss to read the notice and answer some
questions to check their understanding.


- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering
the questions .


- Give feedback


a. To discuss the effects of the new mall


b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m
c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao Street
, Binh ,<sub>s hardware store . </sub>


- Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full
sentences .



* Reading :


Play game
( whole class)


Listen and copy .
- Repeat in chorus.
Work in pairs


Read individually


Practice asking and answering
the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

- Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some questions
to check their understanding , get them to use short
answers .


1. What is the English Speaking club going to hold ?
2. Where and when will it be held ?


3. What time ?


4. Who is the person contact ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .


* While -writing :



- Get Ss to write the notice individually
- Monitor and help them write


- Ask Ss to share with their partners
- Check some notices and correct them
- Write the model notice on the board
Suggested answers :


<i><b>The school English Speaking club</b></i>


Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate teacher,<sub>s</sub>


day
<i><b>Date : November 15 </b></i>


<i><b>Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm </b></i>
<i><b>Place : Hall 204 , Building G</b></i>


<i><b>Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class </b></i>
<i><b>8H at the above address for more information .</b></i>
*Post - writing :


- Ask Ss to write one notice about their class
meeting


- Get them to work in group


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback .



<b>* Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson .
*Homework :


1. Write the completed notice in their notebooks .
2. Do exercises in workbook .


some questions to check their
understanding , get them to use
short answers .


Work in pairs


Practice asking and answering
the questions.


Work individually
Work in pairs
Whole class


Read the correct notice


Ss to write one notice about
their class meeting


Work in group


- Retell the main points .
Listen and copy down


homeworks.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...


<b>Period 44: Unit 7: My neighborhood</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : language focus</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able topractice present perfect with” for and


since” , know and practice comparing with “ like, ( not ) as…… as, ( not) the same, different
form……” .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 99 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
* Warm up : Matching


- Stick a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on
the board.


- Divide the class into 2 teams


- Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write
each pair of infinitive – past participle



be see collected go
worked


lived do seen eat
attended


write been written eaten
work


attend done live collect gone
Answers :


be – been ; write – written ; go – gone
live – lived ; see – seen ; collect –


collected


do – done attend – attended ;eat – eaten
work – worked


- Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past
participles of irregular verbs .


* Presentation :


- Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam ,<sub>s neighborhood .</sub>


They are talking to each other .”


- Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na ,


then ask them to complete it


Na : How long ….. you … in this neighborhood ?
Nam : I ... here …..10 years .


Na : Really . It is a long time .


* Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for
- Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to
practice in pairs .


=> Form : have / has + past participle


* Use : to talk about something which started in
the past and continues up to the present


We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the
Present Perfect Tense : For + length of time


<b>Since + starting point</b>
Exercises :


* Ex 2 :


- Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which
is the length of time and which is starting point .
- Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For
- Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since
* Ex 3 : - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss



Play game
( whole class )


write each pair of infinitive – past
participle


Repeat chorally , individually ,
then copy


Listen and copy
Work in pairs


Practice in front of class .


Listen and copy .


Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and
decide which is the length of time
and which is starting point .
- Read out a phrase , and Ss to
add Since or For


- Go on until Ss can remember
how to use For/Since


Work on the whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...


...
...


<b>Period 45 correcting the test (45 </b>

<b>minutes) – No 2</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 30/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson, T will check the students’ knowledge about


vocabularies, grammar, pronunciation, ….. that they learnt from Unit 3 to Unit 6


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>chalk , board, lesson plan.
<b>3. Procedure: </b>


<b>I. (1point) - 0.25 for each correct sentence</b>


<b>1 - a ; 2 - d; 3- d ; 4 - B</b>


<b>II. (3 points) - 0.3 for each correct sentence</b>
1- in


2 - resources
3- proud


4- mother tongue
5- hard


6- do
7- Let’s


8-best
9-on
10-live
<b>III. (1 điểm): -0.1 for each correct verbs.</b>


1- rode
2- took
3- eate
4-visited
5-did


6- flew
7-lived
8-stayed
9-wrote
10-put
<i><b>IV. </b>(1 điểm): 0.25 for each mistake.</i>


1: listen -> listening 3: to go -> go
2: improve -> to improve 4: fastly -> fast


<b>V. (2 điểm): - 0.5 for each correct sentence </b>
1. He lived in Thanh Hoa city.


2. He speaks English very well.
3. Yes, they are.


4. He is very intelligent, sociable and helpful.
<b>VI. (2 điểm): - 0.5 for each correct sentence </b>



1. My father used to live on a farm.
2. Phong speaks/ can speak English well.


3. She used to look after her children in the past.
4. I told the tiger (that) I left the wisdom at home.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

...
...


<b>Week 17(46-47-48)</b>



<b>Period 46: Unit 8: country life and city life</b>



<b>Lesson 1 : getting started+listen and read</b>



<i>Preparing Date : 30/11/2011</i>
Teaching Date:


<b>1. Objectives: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the city life and the


country life .


<b>2. Teaching aids: </b>Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.
<b>3. Procedure:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>, <sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : * Chatting



- Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the
country by asking some questions


<i>1. Where do you live ? </i>


<i>2. Do you want to live in the city ? Why ? </i>
<i>3. Do you want to live in the country ? Why ? </i>
=> Lead in the new lesson


* Pre -reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


Chatting


( whole class )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

*. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- a relative = uncles , aunts cousins
- peaceful = quiet and calm (a)


- permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time
- accessible = co the den gan duoc


- medical facilities = cac phuong tien y te


<i>* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember </i>
* Brainstorming ( Getting started )



- Get Ss to talk about city life and country life . The
words in the box of getting started may help you .


 Possible answers :


- tall buildings - beautiful views
- plenty kinds of goods - fresh food
- polluted air - fresh air
- traffic jams - friendly


- entertainment - peaceful busy
<b>** While – reading : </b>


*. True / false statements


Statements True False


1. Na lives in the city


2. Na went to a village which has
some relatives lives there .


3. The village is very peaceful and
quiet


4. Hoa prefers the city life


x
x
x



x
- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to
predict the true / false statements .


- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and
write them on the board.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa
and compare their ideas


- Give feedback and get more information
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
*. Comprehension questions :


- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in
ex 2 / 73


- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering
the questions in front of class .


Listen and repeat chorally
Copy down


Play game


Ss to talk about city life and
country life.


- Play agame in two teams.



Work in groups


Work in groups to predict


Read the dialogue , compare their
ideas


Practice the dialogue in pairs
Work in pairs


- some pairs to practice asking
answering the questions in front
of class .


city life
city life
country


life
country


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

- Give feedback


<i>a. Na has been to Kin Lien village </i>
<i>b. She was there for the weekend </i>


<i>c. to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and </i>
<i>there is nothing to do . </i>



<i>d. There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket</i>
<i>, no zoos …</i>


<i>e. Country life is becoming better . Many remote </i>
<i>area are getting electricity . People can now have </i>
<i>things like refrigerators and TV , medical facilities </i>
<i>are more accessible . </i>


- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs
**/ Post - reading : *Discussion


- Divide the class into 4 groups . Two groups
include Ss who prefer the city life and the others
include Ss who prefer the country life .


- Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions
“ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “
- Call on 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their
ideas before class .


** Consolidation: - Retell the main points .
** Homework : Learn by heart new words and
copy two lines for each word .


– Copy the answers in their notebooks .
- Prepare the next lesson .


Practice asking and answering the
questions



Work in groups


Demonstrate their ideas in front
of class .


- Retell the main points .


Listen and copy down
homeworks.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...


<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 47</b>



<b>lesson 2 : Speak and listen.</b>



Preparing Date:
Teaching Date :


A /


<b> Objectives: </b>



<b>I . Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice speaking about the </b>
changes of a place .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: Comparation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I . Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>II. Checking up : - Asks 2 Ss to do exercises : </b>


a) Many lakes / rivers / become / dry . =>
b) Weather / get / worse . =>


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up and pre - speaking
<b>Word square</b>
- Ask Ss to find out 7 adjectives


<b>E</b> <b>X</b> <b>P</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>S</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b>


<b>O</b> <b>A</b> <b>M</b> <b>D</b> <b>N</b> <b>U</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b>



<b>U</b> <b>B</b> <b>O</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>A</b>


<b>I</b> <b>C</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>U</b>


<b>Y</b> <b>L</b> <b>E</b> <b>T</b> <b>L</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>T</b>


<b>S</b> <b>M</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b> <b>H</b> <b>G</b> <b>I</b>


<b>U</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>Y</b> <b>F</b>


<b>B</b> <b>P</b> <b>T</b> <b>F</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>L</b> <b>U</b>


- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams


- Ask Ss to go to the board and circle the word they
find


- The team which circles more words will win the
game .


Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall – expensive –
beautiful


 Setting the scene “ Hoa,s grand father is 78 “
- Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger
than she is now .


- Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health
=> Hoa,<sub>s grand father is getting weaker </sub>



+ Form : am / is / are + V-ing


+ Use : used to describe changes with get and
<b>become </b>


**While – speaking :


- Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and
talk to their partners about the changes of the town .
The words in the box under the pictures may help
you


- Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss
can speak easily


- traffic - > busy
- sky -> cloudy
- houses -> high


Work in group


Ss to find out 7 adjectives.


Ss to go to the board and circle
the word they find


Work in the whole class .


Listen and copy



Work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

- city -> beautiful
- trees - > green
- Get Ss to work in pairs
- Monitor and help Ss speak
* Possible answers :


- The traffic is getting busier .


- There are more tall buildings and houses .
- The houses are getting more modern
- The town is becoming more beautiful .


- The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier
* Language focus 1 : Ask Ss to practice the


dialogue as example


S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?
S2 : Is that good fortune ?


S1 : That is right


S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .
S1 : Oh , no !


S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45


- Give them the shipping information and ask them


to make similar dialogues


** Language focus 2 : Complete the dialogue.Use
the verbs in the present progressive tense .


- Asks Ss do ex in pairs. then to go ti the board to
rewrite on the board.


* Post - speaking :


- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about changes
in their hometown / neighborhood .


- Call on volunteer from each group to show their
ideas before the class . Other groups can add in their
ideas .


<b>* listening: </b>
* Pre - listening


- Set the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the
phone . She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “


- Ask Ss to predict information in the dialogue .
- Call on some Ss to report their predictions
* While - listening :


- Turn on the tape and check their predictions
- Let them listen twice and find out the missing
words individually .



- Ask Ss to share their answers with their partners
- Call some Ss to read their results


Give feedback


1. that 2. this 3. It is 4. where


Ss to practice the dialogue as
example


Work in group
Work individually


Ss do ex in pairs. then to go ti the
board to rewrite on the board.


Listen to the tape to check their
predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

5. from 6. coming 7. next week 8.
arriving 9. Thursday 10 . late 11.
afternoon 12 . speak 13. my 14
. get her.


<b>Consolidation:Retell the main points of this lesson.</b>
* Homework :


Write some sentences , using Present Progressive
Tense to describe changes in their school



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>Unit 8 : Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 48</b>

<b> </b>

<b>lesson 4 : Read</b>


Preparing Date:


Teaching Date :


<b>A / Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text about one </b>
of the social problems .


II. Language contents:


1. Vocabulary: Some words of the city and country.
2. Grammar:


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure: </b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up :</b>


- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson.
-T corrects and give them marks.


III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>



*Warm up : * Jumbled words
- Write the words with disordered letters on the
board .


+ Fulentipl -> plentiful
+ taneru -> nature
+ loofd -> flood
+ roestdy -> destroy
+ viroped -> provide
+ suertl -> result
+ ciliestial -> facilities


- Ask them to write the correct words on the board
and repeat chorally , individually


=> Lead in the new lesson .
* Pre- reading :


- Introduce the topic of the passage reading and
some new words to Ss .


* Pre - teach vocabulary :


- rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside
- urban ( adj ) > < rural


- strain (n) = su qua tai ( dan so )
- typhoon (n) = storm (n)



- drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time
-( to )struggle = dau tranh


- migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place


Work in group


Listen and copy down


Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually , then copy down .
Play game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

to another especially in order to find work .
- (to) increase = tang len , tang them , Gia tang.
* Checking vocabulary : What and where
*. Brainstorming :


- Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmer s, <sub>life .</sub>


Possible answers :


droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations /
lack of clean water / electricity / insects destroy
harvests ..


- Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers
deal with difficulties


- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and


write them on the board .


*While - reading :


- Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to
check their predictions .


- Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve their
problem ? “


=> They have to move to the city so that they can
get well – paid jobs .


- Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class .
* Gap- filling :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary ,
using the information from the passage .


- Call on some volunteers to report their results
- Give feedback


<i>1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural </i>


<i>5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals </i>
<i> 9. problem 10 . world </i>


- Call on some Ss to read the complete passage
aloud



*Finding the words


- Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their
partners


- Call them to report their results
- Give feedback


<i>a. rural b. plentiful c. increase </i>
d. strain e. tragedy f. urban


*Post - reading : Discussion


- Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what
would you do for farmers ?


Work in groups to guess how
farmers deal with difficulties
Some Ss to report their


predictions and write them on the
board .


Demonstrate in front of class
Ss listen to the tape and read the
text silently to check their


predictions .


- Work individually.



-Some Ss to read the text in front
of class .


Ss to work in pairs o complete
summary , using the information
from the passage .


Listen to the tape and read the
text to check their predictions
Answer the question


Read the text aloud .
Work in pairs


Read their results .


Read the complete summary .
Read the text again and do the
exercise 2 / 75


Read the complete results .
Difficulties of farmer s, life


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss
* Suggested answers :


- build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside
- build schools , hospitals



- provide clean water , electricity , facilities
- build factory .


- Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their
ideas before the class .


<b>* Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
*Homework :


1. Write 5 things that government should do for the
rural areas .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Work in groups to discuss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

Week 18( 49-50-51)



<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 49</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : write</b>


Preparing Date: 5/12/2011



Teaching Date :


<b>A / Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letters to their friends </b>
about their neighborhood .


Develop Ss’ Writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: some words of the city and country.
2. Grammar: The form of the letter.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>II. Checking up:</b>


- Asks two Ss to answer the qs 1-2 in the book page 76
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


<b>III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


*Warm up : Revision


- Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in
the correct order .



- Prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them .


- Call 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order
- Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct
order .


- Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to
copy .


1. Heading


- Writer,<sub>s address / Date </sub>


- Dear ………... ,
2. opening


3. Body
4. closing
*Pre- writing :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and


Work on the whole class .
Listen and copy down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

answering the questions
- Give feedback



*While … writing :


- Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their
neighborhood


- Let them write individually .


- Have them compare with their partners and correct
if they can .


* Suggested letter :
<i>( Writer,<sub>s address)</sub></i>


<i>( Date ) </i>
<i><b>Dear ...., </b></i>


<i><b>I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a large </b></i>
<i><b>house with four rooms and a small garden . My </b></i>
<i><b>sister and I share one bedroom . From the </b></i>


<i><b>bedroom window , I can see a beautiful park with </b></i>
<i><b>green tress , flowers and a pond . we do not live far</b></i>
<i><b>form my school so I usually walk there . </b></i>


<i><b>In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool </b></i>
<i><b>and a beautiful park . On the weekend , I often go </b></i>
<i><b>swimming with my friends . Early in the morning ,</b></i>
<i><b>I always jog with my sister around the park . But </b></i>
<i><b>the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the </b></i>
<i><b>public library near my school . There I not only </b></i>


<i><b>can study and read books but also watch video and</b></i>
<i><b>learn how to use the computer . </b></i>


<i><b>Do you have a library like that in your </b></i>


<i><b>neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting in </b></i>
<i><b>the place where you live ? Write to me. I would </b></i>
<i><b>like to say goodbye now.</b></i>


<i><b>I am looking forwards to hearing from you soon.</b></i>
<i><b>Love , </b></i>


<i>( Signature ) </i>


*Post - writing : * Correction


- Choose some letters to correct before class and
ask them to read them aloud .


<b>* Consolidation: </b>


- Reteel the main points of the letter.
*Homework :


1. Write their letters on their notebooks
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Work individually


Compare with their partners



Ss to write letters to friends about
their neighborhood


- Works individually.


Exchange their writings to correct
.


Listen and copy .


Choose some letters to correct
before class and ask them to read
them aloud .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 50 </b>



<b>lesson 5: Language focus </b>



Preparing Date: 5/12/2011
Teaching Date :


<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the present progressive tense</b>
to talk about future actions and changing with “ become/ get” and the comparative.Then do


exercises in Language focus .


- Develop Ss’ listening skill.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: some words of the city and country.


2. Grammar: the present progressive tense to talk about future actions and changing with “
become/ get” and the comparative


<b>III. Teaching aids : Text book , cards , cassette , lesson plan, posters , radio , CD.</b>
<b>B/ Steps of the lesson : </b>


<b>I . Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up : - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to talk about the changes of their town or their </b>
villages in five years ago.


- T corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


Warm up : * Matching


- Prepare eight cards with phrases on them


- Write eight verbs on the board ( play , do , watch ,
go , clean , have , phone , speak )



- Divide the class into 2 teams
- Hand out each team 8 cards


- Ask Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the
suitable verbs


- The team which is faster is the winner
* Answers :


- play table tennis
- do my homework
- watch a program


- go to a violin lesson
- clean the house


- have a meeting


- phone my aunt , Mrs Hang
- speak to Mom


=> Lead in the new lesson .


Work in group


Ss to stick the cards with phrases
besides the suitable verbs


.



Work in pairs to practice the
dialogue


Look at the board.
Work in pairs.


- Ss repeat.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<i><b>Language focus: </b></i>


<b>A. The present progressive to talk about future </b>
<b>actions. </b>


? Repeat the model sentences of the present
progressive.


- T explains about the present progressive with
future meaning.


? Do Ex 1.


- T explains about the ship information.
Ship name: ten tau.


Destination noi den.


Time of the departure: gio khoi hanh.
Status: tinh trang.


Delayed: tri hoan.



Revised time: gio sua lai.
Origin: noi xuat phat.


<b>B/ Show the chang with “ get” and “ become”.</b>
* Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to
describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “
* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues


a. The boys / get / tall


b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark


d. The weather / get / cold
e. The students / get / better


f. The school yard / become / cleaner


- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually
- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in
class can remember the structure .


<b>C/ Comparative and superlative adjectives </b>
- Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and
superlative adjectives


<i>* Comparative : <b>Short adj - er + than + object </b></i>
<i><b> More long adj + than + object </b></i>


<i><b>* Superlative : The + short adjective - est </b></i>


<i><b> The most + long adjective</b></i>
* Irregular adjectives


good/ well – better – the best
bad – worse – the worst
many – more – the most
little – less – the least
* Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make


comparisons between the city and the country .


Ss listen carefully and copy.
Ss read and make the dialogue.


whole class repeat chorally , then
some Ss read out individually
Asks Ss to retell the main
structure grammar about the
forms of comparative and
superlative adjectives .
- One by one.


Ss work in pairs to make


comparisons between the city and
the country .


- Each Student read aloud one of


the sentences they have made .
- Ss to play the roles of Lan and
Aunt Hang to practice the


dialogue .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences
they have made .


- Give feedback
<b>* Consolidation : </b>
- Retell the main points
* Homework :


1. Copy down the completed dialogue in their
notebooks


2. Do exercises in work book
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and copy down
homeworks.


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...



<b>Period 51 </b>



<b>CONSOLIDATION(1)</b>



Preparing Date: 5/12/2011
Teaching Date :


<b>A/ The aims: </b>


<b>I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar </b>
from unit 1 to unit 8 .


- Develop Ss’ four skills.
<b>II. language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Voc of unit 1, 2, 3.
2. Grammar: tense, used to……..


<b>II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .</b>
<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up: </b>


-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.
- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
<b>III. New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>*Warm up : * </b>Matching


A B Key


1. play
2. do


a. to Mom
b. table tennis


1.b
2.g


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

3. watch
4. go
5. clean
6. have
7. phone
8. speak


c. a program
d. a meeting


e. my aunt , Mrs Hang
f. the house


g. my homework
h. to violin lesson



3.c
4.h
5.f
6.d
7.e
8.a
- Call 2 volunteers from 2 teams to do the matching
● Grammar Unit 1 :


a. Present simple : S + V(es/s)….
eg: I go on holiday twice a year.


* Present simple to talk about general truths - It is
used to express an action which is always true .
b. Past simple :


S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + ….
eg:I missed the train this morning .


c. (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive
Eg: He is old enough to see that film .


She is not clever enough to do this thing .
● Grammar Unit 2:


Talk about intentions with going to : Introduce the
form and use of going to


- Form : S + be going to + infinitive


- Use : express an intention


● Grammar Unit 3
<i><b>Reflexive Pronouns </b></i>


- > Form : We use I with myself


You ... yourself / yourselves
He ...himself


She ...herself
We ...ourselves
They ... themselves
It ... itself


- Emphasis( nhan manh, tam quan trong) pronouns :
Used to emphasize a person or a thing .


Eg : She cut herself .


John saw himself in the mirror .


*Ex 2 : Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the
Present Progressive Tense to complete the exercise
- Get Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogues before
class and correct


=> What tense do we use in 6 dialogues ?


What is the form ?


Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue . Are


Work in pairs


Answer the questions


Work in pairs


Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

they at present or in the future ?


* Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about
<i>the future . </i>


*Ex 1 : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example
S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?
S2 : Is that good fortune ?


S1 : That is right


S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .
S1 : Oh , no !


S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45


- Give them the shipping information and ask them
to make similar dialogues



*Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to
describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “
* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues


a. The boys / get / tall


b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark


d. The weather / get / cold
e. The students / get / better


f. The school yard / become / cleaner


- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually
- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in
class can remember the structure .


* <i><b>Comparative and superlative adjectives </b></i>
- Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and
superlative adjectives


* Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object
<b> More long adj + than + object </b>
* Superlative : The + short adjective - est


<b> The most + long adjective</b>
* Irregular adjectives



good/ well – better – the best
bad – worse – the worst
many – more – the most
little – less – the least


●Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons
between the city and the country .


Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences
they have made .


- Give feedback
*Further practice :


Listen and copy


Work in pairs


Listen and answer the questions


Play game
( whole class )


Ss work in pairs to make


comparisons between the city and
the country .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

- Ask Ss to read the advertisements then ask them
some questions to check their understanding
+ what are advertised ?


( an apartment , a villa and a house )
+ How old are they ?


( The apartment is 2 years old , the villa is 5 years
old and the house is new )


+ How much do we pay per month ?


( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million
dongs for the house and 7,8 million dongs for the
villa )


- Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using comparative
and superlative adjectives


old expensive big


expensive small hot


big beautiful old


Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment
- The house is more expensive than the
apartment .


<b>* Consolidation:</b>



- Retell the main points of some Structure grammar.
*Homework :


1/Redo all the exercises and copy down
2/ Prepare the next lesson .


their understanding
- Work in pairs.


- Some Ss to retell the main
structure grammar.


]


Listen and copy down homeworks


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<i><b>Week 19 (52-53-54)</b></i>



<b>Period 52 </b>


<b> </b>


<b> </b>

<b>CONSOLIDATION ( 2 )</b>



Preparing Date: 12/12/2011
Teaching Date :



<b>A/ Objectives: </b>


<b>I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to grasp (su nam bat dc, su hieu </b>
thau.) knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement( bo sung )
what they are short of (tru phi)


Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit 1 to unit 8 .
- Develop Ss’ four skills.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar:


<b>III. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .</b>
<b>B/ Procedures: </b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up: </b>


-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.
- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : Chatting about daily routine
*/ Consolidation :



1. Grammar


- Ask Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the
first semester and write on the board


1.1. The tenses :


- Present Simple / - Past simple
- Present progressive / - Present perfect
- Simple future


1.2. The form of the verbs


- Modal verbs : can , could , may might


- Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as
like / dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions
- Have Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples
with each one .


2. Exercises :


- Using the posters with some exercises to show .
2.1. Give the correct form of the verbs in the


Play game


Repeat the tenses they have learnt
.



Listen and copy , then give some
more examples


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

brackets + Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or
Gerund


+ Ex 5 / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present
perfect


- Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of lass
- Ask some Ss to go to the board to write them on
the board


- Give feedback
<b>*Grammar:</b>
1.2 Comparison
- Comparative
- Superlative
- Like


- (not) as …….. as
- (not) the same as
- different form


1.2 Direct and indirect speech
- Commands


- Requests


- Advice


=> S + told + O +(not) to + V …..
2. Exercises :


- Ex 7 / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison


- Ex 3 / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook )
+ Have Ss work in pairs to do all the exercises
+ Call on some pairs to practice in front of class
+ Give feedback


 <b>Consolidation: </b>


- Retel the main points of some Structure grammar .
 <b>Homework : </b>


1. Redo all the exercises and copy
2. Prepare the test :


- Complete these sentences with the suitable words
or phrases in the brackets .


- Complete the conversation


- Read the passage carefully , then answer the
questions below


- Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the
brackets



- Listening comprehension


Work in pairs to the exercises
and exchange their answers with
their friends .


Listen and copy


Repeat and give some more
examples


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of class .


Copy down


<b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>Period 53</b>



<b>A / The aims : </b>



<b>I. Teaching points</b>

: Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have


learnt form unit 1to unit 8 so that they can supplement what they are short of .


Students will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt to do the


test well



<b>II. Teaching aids :</b>

Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test.




<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>


<b>I. Organization:</b>



<b>II. Checking up: </b>



<b>III. Contents:</b>

- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson .


- Deliver test papers to Ss .



<b>I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the </b>


<b>brackets 2,0 Ps </b>



1 . We must be there( at /before/ between /after )7. 30 and 8 . 15


2. Vietnamese language is different ( as/like / from /with ) English


language .



3. She told me ( giving / to give /gave ) you this present .



4. Jane is( as/ like /the most / more ) beautiful than her sister .)


5 . Mary likes( playing/ plays /played /play )the piano .



6. When my uncle was young , he used ( go/ went /going/ to go ) fishing on


Sundays



7. He ( left / has left / leaves ) for London a year ago .


8. I have known her ( since / for / at / in ) three years .



<i><b>II / </b></i>

<b>Complete the conversation</b>

<i><b> : ( 2,0 Ps )</b></i>



A : Can I help you ?




B : I would like ……… this parcel to Hanoi



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

A : I will have ……….. the parcel first . Well , two kilograms . That will be


9,000 dong



B : That is not very cheap . But ………..it airmail .


A : All right .



III / Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in the brackets : ( 2,0


Ps )



1. They ( live ) …………... in Hanoi for 20 years .



2. My aunt ( not go ) ……….. out of her house since she ( buy )………. a


color TV



3. The film ( begin ) ………..at 7. 30 pm tonight .



IV/

<i>Read the passage carefully . Then answer the questions below</i>

: ( 2,0



Ps )



Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a wonderful night market . In


the evening , the main street is lined with small stands and shops that sell


almost anything you can imagine . Some stands sell jewelry or clothing ,


others sell traditional Thai crafts and still others sell fresh fruit and species .


It is easy to spend an entire evening just looking at everything . If you


decide to buy something , you will not be disappointed The prices are very


reasonable . There are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai , but the



night market is a favorite for many people .



1. Where is Chiang Mai ?



2. What is Chiang Mai famous for ?



3. What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai ?


4. Are the prices expensive ?



<b>V / </b>

Listening comprehension : You are going to listen twice . Check (v) the correct box for True
or False : ( 2,0 Ps )


Statements

True False



1. Ba is younger than Lan



2. Lan is shorter than her brother



3. Both Ba and Lan go to school in the


morning



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

6. Ba likes watching war films on TV


<i><b> </b></i><b>4. EXPERIENCED LESSON</b>


...
...
...
<i><b> </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<b>LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 8</b>




<i><b>The second semester</b></i>



<b>Unit 9 : A first aids course</b>



<i><b>Date preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching date : </b></i>


<b>Period 54</b> <b>Lesson 1 : </b>

<b>Getting started +</b>


<b>Listen and read .</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they would do in the</b>
situations which require first - aid.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: The present simple tense.


<b>III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.</b>
- T. corrects and give them marks.



<b>III. New lesson: </b>


<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Ss’ activitives</b>
* Warm up : <i><b>Kim</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s game</sub></b></i><sub> ( </sub><i><b><sub>Getting started )</sub></b></i>


- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the
things on page 80 for 20 seconds . Tell them these
things are often used for first - aid


- Divide the class into two groups .


- Tell them the group having the most right
English words is the winner .


- Have them open the books again and go through
the words in English .


<i>* Suggested answers :</i>


1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing
3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack 6.
alcohol


- Have them discuss and write down what they
would do in these situations which require first –
aid


<i>Possible answers : </i>


+ A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water /


ice to ease the pain


Whole class
Team work


- Ss to close their books and go to
the board to write the names of the
things they have just seen from
memory .


- Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

+ A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol /
medicated oil / sterile dressing


+ A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to
stop the bleeding / tell her to lie down .


+ A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil …
*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


+ Pre teach (Vocabulary ):
- First- aid: (n) So cuu.


- (an) ambulance : xe cuu thuong (Pic)


- (an) emergence = cap cuu , tinh trang khan cap
- unconscious (adj) > < conscious (adj) tinh tao
-( to) bleed : chay mau.



- Sterile dressing (n) : gac vo trung .
-> Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary in their
notebooks


* Checking technique: * Slap the board
<i>( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board )</i>
* Gap filling Prediction


- Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board .
<i><b> There was an emergency at Lan</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s school . A </sub></b></i>


<i><b>student …..(1)…. off her bike and hit her head </b></i>
<i><b>on the road . She was …..(2)…. but she cut her </b></i>
<i><b>head and the …….(3)…. was ……(4)….. badly .</b></i>
<i><b>Lan telephoned Bach Mai Hospital and asked </b></i>
<i><b>the nurse to send an ……(5)….. to Quang </b></i>
<i><b>Trung School . Lan was asked to keep the </b></i>
<i><b>student …..(6)…. while waiting for the </b></i>
<i><b>ambulance . </b></i>


- Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps
* While - reading :


- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape
while reading the dialogue , then check their
predictions


- Give feedback 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut
4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6.


awake


* Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and select the
topic covered in the dialogue .


- Have Ss work in groups to write their answers
on a sheet of paper and hand in after finishing .
- Collect Ss ,<sub> papers and give feedback : a- b- c- </sub>


e- f


- Copy down new lesson.
- Repeat in chorus.


T – Ss


Whole class
Team work


- Ss to go to the board and write
their words.


Individual work
T – Ss


Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
T – Ss



Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

<b>* Language focus 2 : - Revision the Future </b>
<b>simple</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue
and exchange their roles.


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :


<i>1. will 2. will 3. won,<sub>t , 4. Shall 5. will 6. </sub>,<sub> ll</sub></i>


* Post - reading :


*Role play : - Have Ss in turn play the roles to
demonstrate the dialogue .


* <i><b>Write - it -up :</b><b> </b></i>Ask Ss to write a story using the
information from the dialogue .


- Tell Ss to begin their story with :


“ Yesterday there was an emergency at ……. “
- Monitor and help Ss with their work .


<b>* Consolidation: - Retell the main points .</b>
* Homework : - Learn by heart new words.
Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 /
55 ).



- Retell the main points.
- Listen and copy down
homeworks.


<b>Unit 9 : A first aids course</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching </b></i>
<b>Period 55</b>


<b>lesson 2</b>

<b>: Speak + language focus 2. 3 , 4.</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- Develop Ss’ speaking skill.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: request, offers, and promises.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have just seen </b>
from memory .



=> T corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


● Warm up : * Net work


*


<i>Possible answers : </i>


- have a snake bite / have a burn / have a cut /
have a bee sting / have a nose bleed ...


*Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the
speaking and some models sentences .


* Set the scene :


- Ask Ss some questions to elicit the models


<b>a. I want you to get me a bandage. How can I say? </b>
<b>b. I would like you to come to my party. How can I </b>
say?


<b>c. I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work </b>
before bedtime . How can I say ?


- Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on


the board ( underline the key words )


a. Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ?
b. Would you like to come to my party ?
c. I promise I will finish my homework before
bedtime .


=> Concept checking


- Get Ss to work out the rules for themselves by
asking questions .


- After formulating the model sentences , elicit some
more phrases with the same use from students .
*


<b> </b><i><b>To make a request : </b></i>


<b>Would /can / could / Will + you (please) + V…? </b>


Group work of 8 – 10 students


- Ss some questions to elicit the
models


- Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before
writing them on the board
( underline the key words )


- Ss to work out the rules for


themselves by asking questions
T- Ss


- Pairs work


T – Ss


<i><b>Situations which </b></i>


<i><b>require first </b></i>

<i><b> aid</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i>*Reponses : </i>


<b>+ Sure / Ok / All right . </b>


<b>- I am sorry . I can / I am afraid not </b>
<i><b>* To make an offer </b></i>


<b>Will / Won,<sub>t you </sub></b>


<b> Shall I / can I + V …..?</b>
<b> Can I </b>


<b>Would you like + to + V …...? </b>
<b>What can I do / get for you ? </b>


<b>Can I get you ………..? </b>
<i><b>*Responses</b></i><b> : </b><i><b> </b></i>


<b>+ Yes , please . / That would be nice . </b>
<b>- No , thank you . </b>



1.3 To make a promise


<b>I promise I will / I will not ………..</b>
<b>I will ………... I promise .</b>


<b>I promise to …………...</b>
<i><b>*Reponses : </b></i>


<b>I hope . / Good . / I am glad . / Do not forget</b>
- Ask Ss to copy down .


* While - speaking :
<b>+ Matching : </b>


- Hang the chart with the statements on the board .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and
match the situations with the statements .
1. The girl has a burn on her hand .


2. The girl has a bad fever .


3. The boy has just broken the vase .
4. The boy has a headache .


5. The boy has a snake bite .


- Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5. c
*Picture Drill :



- Identify the situations in the pictures
Picture a) -> request


“ b) -> offer / request
“ c) -> offer / request
“ d) -> offer


“ e) -> promise
- Ask Ss to work in pairs


+ Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ?
Sure . Here you are


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges
in front of class.


* Post - speaking :


- T – Ss
- Pairs work


Ss to copy down


Ss to look at the pictures ( page
82 ) and match the situations
with the statements .


Whole class


Group work of 4 / 5 Ss



Ss to work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

Pair work ( closed pairs )


- Get Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges
- Monitor and correct , encourage Ss to make
sentences for themselves


- Collect their ideas and write them on the boards
* Suggested answers :


b. A : Can I get you some water / medicine ?
B : Yes, please .


c. A : Can I get you some bandage ?
B : That would be nice


d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get you some
medicine / water ?


B : No , I am fine . Thank you .


e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house
again.


B : I hope so .


* Language focus 3 + 4 :



● Making requests , offers and promises with will
Ex 3: Making requests , offers and promises with
<b>will :- Explain the aims of the exercise </b>


- Ask Ss to read each situation and work in pairs to
complete the dialogue.


- Give feedback :


a. Will you open the window , please , Nga ?
b . will you give it to me , please ?


Ex 4 : Work with a partner
- Explain the aims of the exercise
- Ask Ss to read the example aloud .


- Have Ss work in pairs to make requests , offers or
promises


- Give feedback


b. Will you paint the door , please ?
I will paint the door tomorrow .
c . Will you study harder , please ?
I will study harder .


d. Will you carry the bag for me , please ?
Shall I carry the bag for you ?


e. Will you hang the washing , please ?


Shall I hang the washing for you ?
f. Will you cut the grass , please ?
I will cut the grass for you .


<b>* Consolidation: - Retell the main points.</b>
* Homework :


1. Do exercise 3, 4/ 56 ( workbook )


- Ss in turn to practice all the
exchanges.


- Ss to make sentences for
themselves.


- T – Ss
Pair work


-Some pairs to practice in front
of class .


- Ss to read all the words in the
box . Be sure Ss to understand
the meaning of them and each
situation .


- Some pairs to read their
answers aloud .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

2. Prepare the next lesson .



<b>Unit 9 : A first aids course</b>


<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching :</b></i>
<b>Period 56</b>


<b>Lesson 3</b>

<b>: Listen +language focus 1.</b>



<b>A / Objcetives: </b>


<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to listen for details </b>
about the activities talking place in an emergency room .


II. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar:


<b>II. Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan. posters,pictures and a </b>
chart.


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>
<b>I . Organization: </b>


- Greeting and checking attendance.
<b>II. Checking up:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>
<b>III. </b>
<b>New </b>


<b>lesson:</b>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 130 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
● Warm up : Guess from context What action ?


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and write out all the
verbs describing the actions of the people in it .
- Tell Ss the group having the most right verbs is the
winner .


- Give feedback : to drive , wheel / move / push ,
<i>weight , wait , lie , stand , lean . </i>


= > Lead in the new lesson


*Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words


* Pre teach vocabulary :


- an eye chart ( using picture ) -> eye sight


- a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not
a doctor nor a nurse


- a wheelchair ( using the picture )
-> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair )
- a stretcher ( picture )



- a crutch -> crutches ( picture )
-> Have Ss copy


* Checking technique : What and where
* Matching :


- Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again
and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct
words in the box .


- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .


- Give feedback


A -> ambulance D -> eye chart
B -> wheelchair E -> scale
C -> crutches F -> stretcher
●While – listening :


* Order Prediction


- Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words .
- Put the words in the table


Guess key
ambulance
wheelchair
crutches
eye chart


scale
stretcher
3
2
6
4
5
1
- Have Ss copy and guess the order of the words
- Play the tape and ash Ss to listen


- Ask Ss to give their answers and correct
*. True / False statements


- Stick the chart with the statements on the board :
+ A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency
room .


Group work 0f 4/5 Ss


Ss the group having the most
right verbs is the winner .


- Listen to and copy down new
lesson.


-Repeat in chorus.


T – Ss



Ss copy down.


- Ss to look at the picture in
their books again and match the
letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the
correct words in the box .


T- Ss / individual work
Ss are going to listen to a
paragraph about the activities
taking place in an emergency
room which contains the words
on the board


Groupwork of 4/5 Ss


Ss copy and guess the order of
the words


Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Unit 9 : A first aids course</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching :</b></i>
<b>Period 57</b>


<b>lesson 4 :</b>

<b> Read </b>




<b>A / Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to read for the instructions about </b>
some more situations requiring first – aid . Ss will be able to know how to use “ <i><b>in order to , so </b></i>
<i><b>as to”. </b></i>


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>
1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: commants


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , </b>
mimes , 4 cardboards .


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up :- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. </b>
And then T corrects and give them marks.


III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


● Warm up : * Bingo


- Ask Ss to give nouns for emergencies which


require first – aid and write them on the board ( burn


, cut , bee sting , snake bite , fainting , shock , nose
bleed )


- Have Ss choose 4 any 4 words on the board and
write them down on a piece of paper .


- call out the words until someone has ticked all the
four words and shouts “ Bingo “


* Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of reading
passage and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


-(to) lie flat : ( mime / drawing )
-(to) elevate = (to) lift > < (to) lower
- (a) victim : a person who needs first aid
- (to) overheat : make something too hot
- Tissue damage(n) : ton thuong mo
- (to) ease : lam de chiu, lam diu di


* Checking technique : Rub out and remember
* Network


- Draw the network with some examples on the
board


- Ask Ss to think of what to do in these emergency


Whole class



Ss choose 4 any 4 words on the
board and write them down on a
piece of paper .


Individual


- `Have Ss copy down.
Repeat in chorus.


T – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

cases


- Collect and write the students, <sub>ideas on the bard </sub>


* While – reading :


- Have Ss open their books and read the instructions
page 83


* Matching :


- Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match
tree Leadings A , B , C to them .


Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d
* Grid : - Draw the grid on the board .


- Ask Ss to read the instructions again and fill the


information .


- Call on some Ss to the board to write their answers
- Give feedback


Cases Do Don,<sub>t</sub>


Fainting


- Leave the patient
lying flat .


- Elevate the
patients,<sub> feet or </sub>


lower his / her head .


- Do not force
him / her to sit
or stand .


Shock


- Give him / her a
cup of tea when he /
she revives .


- Do not
overheat the
victim with


blankets or coat
- Do not give the
victim any food
or drink or drug .


Burns


- Cool the burn
immediately to
minimize the tissue
damage .


- Put the affected
part under a running
cold tap .


- Ease the pain with
ice or cold water
packs .


- Cover the burned
area with a thick
sterile dressing .


- Have Ss copy the grid in their notebooks .


Whole class


- Ss to go to the board and add
the missing information .



Individual


- Ss to read the instructions
again and fill the information .
- Some Ss to the board to write
their answers


Individual


Pair work


Group work .


- Some volunteers from each
group to demonstrate in front of
class .


Ss to exchange their answers to
correct for each other .


Shock


Shock Fainting<sub>Fainting</sub>
Burns
Burns


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

* Post – reading :


- Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing


how to give first aid . And Call on some volunteers
from each group to demonstrate in front of class .
<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :


1. Let Ss do the exercises 6,7 in the workbook .


2. Prepare the next lesson . - Retell the main points
- Copy down homeworks


<b>Unit 9</b>



<b>A first aids course</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>
<b>Period 58</b>


<b>lesson 5</b>

<b>: Write</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a thank – </b>
you note .


Develop Ss’ Writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar:


<b>III.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>II. Checking up:</b>


- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : Shark attack


( Revised words : lie flat , elevate , lower , victim ,
ease )


 Lead in the new lesson .


* Pre – writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss


*. Pre- teach vocabulary :


- disease (adj) mac benh , (n) benh cua co the .
- gloomy ( adj) toi tam , u am , am dam.



- Get on together : song hoa thuan voi ai.
-( to) thank Sb for sth


Eg : She thanked me for helping her


- (to )cheer Sb up = to make Sb feel happier : co vu,
chia se


T- Ss


T- Ss


- (to come over ( translation )
+ (an ) Occasion : dip gi…
+ (to) contact : lien he, tiep xuc.
Have Ss copy


* Checking technique : slap the board
*. Set the scene


- Ask Ss to close their books and listen “ Nga was
sick and she had to go to the hospital . After she left
the hospital , she wrote a thank – you note to Hoa .
Why and what did she write ? “


<b>*. True / False Predictions </b>


- Hang the poster with the statements on the board
+. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some come candy .
+. Hoa,<sub>s gift cheered Nga up .</sub>



+ Nga ,<sub>d like Hoa to see her at the hospital .</sub>


+. Nga is very bored now .


Whole class


S- Ss to close their books and
listen “ Nga was sick and she
had to go to the hospital.


- Ss to read the statements and
predict


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

+. Nga writes the letter at the hospital .
- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict .


- Get S to give their predictions and write them on the
board .


- Ask Ss to look at the letter and complete it with the
right verb forms .


- Monitor and help Ss with the tense forms .
- Call on some Ss to give their answers and give
feedback .


- Ask Ss to read the whole letter and check if their
prediction are right or not .



<b>* Answer key : </b>


1. False -> flower ( not candy ) 2. True
3. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
4. True


5. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
* While – writing : <i><b>Questions and answers</b></i>


- Tell Ss they are going to write a thank – you note to
a friend and invite him / her to go on a picnic with
them .


- Ask Ss to read the questions carefully to answer
orally


- Have Ss practice speaking to each other .
- Monitor and correct .


- Get Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to make
it a thank – you note .


- Tell Ss to write their letters in their exercise
notebooks .


* Post – writing : <i><b>Exhibition </b></i>


- Divide the class into 4 groups and choose a letter
randomly in each group .



- Compare their letters and correct .


- Call on some more Ss to read their letters for class
- Give feedback and correct .


<b>* Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main pointsof this lesson.
* Homework :


1. Ask Ss to use the same format to write another letter
to another friend for another occasion .


2. Do the exercises in the workbook .


Individual


- Ss to read the whole letter and
check if their prediction are
right or not .


T – Ss


- Ss to join the sentences into a
paragraph to make it a thank –
you note .


- Ss to write their letters in their
exercise notebooks .



T – Ss
Groupwork


- Compare their letters and
correct


Individual


- Some more Ss to read their
letters for class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<b>Unit 10: Recycling</b>


<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 59</b>


<b>lesson 1 : Getting started</b>


<b>Listen and read.</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they should do to</b>
protect the environment and save natural resources . They will also be able to understand the
structure: S + to be + adj + that – clause.


- Developing Skills: listening, reading, speaking.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>



1. Vocabulary: environment words.


2. Grammar: modal verb ‘ can’ , present simple.


<b>III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan ,6 flashcards , a </b>
chart.


<b>B/ Procedu</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.</b>
- T. corrects and give them marks.


<b>III. New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>T</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
1/ Warm up: getting started _ p.89


- Set the scene: Play the song 3R
+ What’s the title of the song?


Phân loại rac để làm gì? (Tái chế) đó
là chủ đề của bài học hơm nay và các
em sẽ hiểu rõ hơn 3R nghĩa là gì.
*Matching:


- Show 4 pictures.


<b>- Explain the words: Use cloth bags,</b>
use tree leaves to wrap things, make
garbage into fertilizer, make vegetable


matter into animal food…


- Ask students to match the words with
the pictures.


- Ask students to work in pairs:
A: We should use ...
B: Yes, that ‘s right.


2. Preteach vocabulary ;
T: present new words


New words


-(to) recycle: tái chế (Situation)
-(to) reduce: giảm (Antonym)
-(to) reuse: tái sử dụng (Visual)
-(to) throw: ném (Visual)


-(to) contact: liên lạc (Translation)
-(to) overpackage: gói kỹ (Situation)


- Check by matching.


3./ Presentation the dialogue: Listen
<b>and read P.89. </b>


T: Set the scene: <b>Miss Blake</b>


<sub>A representative from Friends of the</sub>



Earth, Miss Blake, is talking to the
5’


10’


<b> - Listen to the song. </b>
- Answer.


- Listen and repeat then translate.
- Listen and repeat


- Listen and repeat
- Copy


- Match


<b>work in pairs</b>
- Listen


Sts: listen to the tape while reading
the dialogue.


Sts: practice the dialogue ( pairs)


-Read through the statements
-Predict True or False


-Listen and read the dialogue
Sts: listen to the tape check T or F.


-read aloud.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

students of Quang Trung school. Friends
of the Earth shows people how to protect
the environment and save natural
resources




 True/False predictions


1. Friends of the Earth is an
organization to help people make
friends with each other.


2.Miss Blake asks the students to
remember 3 things: reduce, reuse,
recycle.


3.We cannot reuse things like
envelopes, glass, plastic bottles and old
plastic bags.


4.Miss Blake says that we should use
cloth bags.


<i><b>-ask sts to predict</b></i>
<i><b>-T gets feeback1..</b></i>


<i><b>-plays the tape and ask sts to check the</b></i>


<i><b>prediction. </b></i>


<b>-Getfeedback 2.</b>


<b>-call some group read aloud.</b>
<b>-show the questions.</b>


<b>* Comprehension questions</b>


a, What does Miss Blake mean by
<i>reduce?</i>


b, What things can we reuse?
c, What does recycle mean?


d, Where can we look for information on
recycling things?


<b>Answer key:</b>


a/ Reduce means not buying product
which are overpackaged


b/ We can reuse things like envelopes,
glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags
c/ Recycle means not just throwing things


away. Try and find another use for them.
d/ We can look for information on



recycle things by having a contact with
an organization like Friends of the Earth,
going to the local library, or asking your
family and friends or scientific society.


<b>. Give model sentences:</b>


<i><b>I am pleased that you want to know</b></i>
10’


10’


-Answer the question in pairs.


- Find the sentence from the


dialogue.


- Read in choral then


individual.


- Translate the model


sentences.


- Make sentences from the cues


Read aloud



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<i><b>more</b></i>


- Have Sts read again in choral and
individual.


. Concept check:


- Meaning:


- Form: S + tobe + adj + that –


<b>clause.</b>


- Use: Adj followed by a noun


clause
<b>. Practice</b>


- Give the cues


|<b>She / happy / I passed my exam.</b>
|<b> They / sure / he will come here.</b>
|<b> It / good / we reduce the</b>
<b>garbage.</b>


4. Consolidation (5’)
- Shows the picture: 3R


- Ask Sts to retell the meaning of 3 word:
<b>3R and the form.</b>



5. Homework (5’)


- Learn by heart new words and form;
- Write 3 sentences using the cues and
the new form.


7’


3’


2’


- Practice in pairs


- Re tell the main points of this


lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<b>Unit 10: Recycling</b>


<i><b>Teaching date : </b></i>


<b>Period 59</b>


<b>lesson 1 : Getting started</b>


<b>Listen and read.</b>


<b>A / The aims </b>



<b>I. Teaching points:</b>

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to do something to


protect the environment and save natural resources .




<b>I . Teaching aids</b>

: Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan ,6


flashcards , a chart.



<b>B/ Steps of the lesson: </b>



<b>I. Organizaton:</b>

-Greeting and checking attendance.



<b>II. Checking up:</b>

- Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.


- T. corrects and give them marks.



<b>III. New lesson: </b>



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>
*Warm up : Brainstorming (Getting started)


Reuse plastic bags


- Ask Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of
garbage they produce .


- Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups
- Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish


Group work of 4/5 teams .


- Ss to think of ways to reduce the
amount of garbage they produce .
- Ss to put the posters on the board
after they finish and the team


having the most good ideas is the
winner .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

and the team having the most good ideas is the winner .
- Give feedback


( Use cloth bags , use tree leaves to wrap things , make
garbage into fertilizer , make vegetable matter into
animal food … )


 Lead in to new lesson .


Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss .


* Pre – teach vocabulary :
- representative (n) = dai dien


- to protect = to keep so/ sth safe from danger .
-> to protect so / sth from so / sth


- natural resource (n) : coal mines , oil / gold / mineral
deposits


- to recycle “ to make sth already used able to be used
again .


- to contact = to communicate with so by telephone or
letter .



-> Have Ss copy .


* Checking technique : Jumbled words


- Stick 6 flashcards with jumbled words on the board


- Ask Ss to rewrite the words in the right order .


- Tell Ss the first two groups with right words will get 2
points .


- Correct and give feedback


contact – representative – resource
natural – protect – recycle


<b>*True / false predictions </b>


- Set the scene “ <i>A representative from Friends of the </i>
<i>Earth , Miss Blake , is talking to the students of Quang </i>
<i>Trung School . Friends of the Earth shows people how </i>
<i>to protect the environment and save natural resources </i>“
- Put the chart with the statements on the board .


1. Friends of the Earth is an organization to help
people make friends with each other .


2. Miss Blake asks the students to remember 3
things : reduce , reuse , recycle .



3. Reduce means buying the products which are over
packed .


4. We can not reuse things like envelopes , glass ,
plastic bottles , old plastic bags .


- Copy down new lesson.


Individual


Teacher – Ss


Whole class


Group work of 4/5 Ss


- Put the chart with the statements
on the board.


Ss to work in pairs to decide if the
statements are true or false .
some Ss to read their guesses and
write them on the board .


tconatc psentreretive


a ceresoru


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

5. Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags and
should not use plastic bags at all .



6. Recycling means not just throwing things away
but trying and finding another use for them .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are
true or false .


- Call on some Ss to read their guesses and write them
on the board .


While – reading :
*. Checking predictions


- Ask Ss to open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue .


- Call on Ss to correct the false statements .
- Give feedback


1. False -> an organization to help people
2. True


3. False -> Reduce means not buying …
4. False -> We can reuse things …
5. True 6. True


* Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs .
- Monitor and help Ss with their work



- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .


- Give feedback


<i>a. Reduce means not buying products which are over </i>
<i>packed . </i>


<i>b. We can reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic </i>
<i>bottles and old plastic bags . </i>


<i>c. Recycle means not just throwing things away . Try </i>
<i>and find another use for them . </i>


<i>d. We can look for information on recycling things by </i>
<i>having a contact with an organization like Friends of </i>
<i>the Earth , going to the local library or asking your </i>
<i>family and friends . </i>


<i>e. We should not use plastic bags because when we </i>
<i>throw them away , they could stay very long and could </i>
<i>not be self- destroyed . </i>


* Post – reading : * Discussion


<i><b>“How to protect our environment ?”</b></i>


- Ask Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this topic .
- Write their ideas on the board into a list



- Give feedback , correct and hove them copy .
* Consolidation:


-Retell the main points of this lesson.
*Homework :


1. Write the questions and full answers in your exercise


Teacher – Ss


Ss to look at the questions and
work in pairs .


Pair work
Individual


Whole class


Ss to express their opinions / ideas
on this topic


Pair work


Individual


Some Ss Retell the main points of
this lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

notebook .



2. Do the exercises ( 1,2 ) in the Workbook .


<b>Unit 10: Recycling</b>


<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching: </b></i>


<b>Period 60</b>


<b>lesson 2: Speak + Listen</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice giving and responding </b>
to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost .


- Develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills.
<b>II. language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Voc of recycling.


2. Grammar: infinitive commands, modals: should, can.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure: </b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have just seen </b>


from memory .


=> T corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


*Warm up : 6’ Kim<b>,<sub>s game </sub></b>


* Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers ,
books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars ,
plastic bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable
matter , clothes , shoes , school bags …


<b>* Speak 25’</b>


* / Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the
speaking and some new words to students .
* Pre-teach vocabulary :


- Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make
their plants or trees grow well .


-> to fertilize


- Compost (n) : What do you call the fertilizer made
from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ?


-> compost heap
- Fabric (n) = material



- Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ?
+ Have Ss copy in their notebooks .


Whole class
Team work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

 <b>Checking technique : Bingo </b>
*Dictation list :


- Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for
items and put them into the right groups .


- Draw the table on the words and put them in the
right columns .


- Model some words .


- Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up
- After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give
their answers .


- Read the words again and correct


<b>Group</b> <b>Items</b>


Paper used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard
boxes


Glass ( bottles , glasses , jars )


Plastic (Plastic bags , plastic bottles )
Metal ( food cans , drinking tins ..)
Fabric Clothes ( cloth bags , material )
Leather ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags )
Vegetabl


e matter


Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits )
*While – speaking :


Mapped dialogue :


- Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board .
- Elicit the exchanges from students


- Have some pairs practice each exchange before
going on to another exchange .


- After fishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to
demonstrate the whole dialogue .


a. Open pairs :


- Ask some pairs to practice in front of class .
b. Closed pairs :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information
with the words in the dictation list



- Monitor and correct .


A B


Which group ( do
clothes ) belong to ?
What can we do with
( those clothes ) ?
Is / are ( fruit vegetable
matter ) ?


What will we do with
(it ) ?


Put ( them ) in fabric
We can ( recycle them
and make them into
paper or shopping
bags .


That is right
We make ( it into


Individual


Individual
Pair work


Ss to work in pairs and give their
answers .



some pairs practice each
exchange before going on to
another exchange .


Teacher –Ss


Ss to work in pairs , replacing the
information with the words in the
dictation list


Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

compose and fertilizer
our field . )


 <b>Post speaking :</b>
<b>*Listening : 10’</b>
Multiple choice :


- Tell Ss they are going to listen to an expert who
gives the instructions to make compost .


- Ask Ss to open their books and read the multiple
choice questions


- Have them guess the answers


- Turn on the tape 2 or 3 times , Ss listen and do the
exercise .



- Get Ss to give their answers and correct
Answers : a. A b. B c. A d. B


- Have them copy
<b>* Consolidation: 3’</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
*Home work : 1’


1. Copy down the dialogue , replacing the
information .


2. Do the exercises in the work book.
3. Prepare the next lesson .


the multiple choice questions


Individual.


Some Ss Retell the main points of
this lesson.


Copy down homeworks


<b>Unit 10: Recycling</b>


<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching :</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

<b>lesson 3: Read</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in the Present </b>
Simple .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Voc of recycling.


2. Grammar: Passive form, Present perfect.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . pictures ,</b>
drawing .


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up :</b>


- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson.
-T corrects and give them marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 147 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
*Warm up : Word square



<b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>V</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>M E</b> <b>N</b> <b>T</b>


<b>N</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>G</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>B</b> <b>A</b> <b>G</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b>


<b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>D</b> <b>O</b> <b>P</b> <b>P</b> <b>U</b> <b>R</b> <b>E</b>


<b>E</b> <b>J</b> <b>U</b> <b>E</b> <b>Y</b> <b>I</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>S</b> <b>C</b>


<b>L</b> <b>U</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>P</b> <b>A</b> <b>P</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b>


<b>O</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b>


<b>P</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>U</b> <b>U</b> <b>L</b>


<b>E</b> <b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>R</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b>


<b>R</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>K</b>


<b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>G</b> <b>H</b> <b>G</b> <b>I</b> <b>J</b> <b>L</b>


- Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there
are 12 hidden words .


- Divide the class into 4 groups .


- Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper
and hand in when they finish


- Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the
winner .



Answer key :


environment , garbage , pure ,
used paper , protect .
envelope , dust , green tree ,
can , plastic , paper bag ,
reduce , reuse , recycle
* Pre – reading :Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- tire (n) : using picture
- pipe (n) : using drawing


- deposit (n) : khoan tien gui vao mot tai khoan
- to refill = to fill something empty again


- to melt >< to freeze


- Get Ss to copy in their notebooks .


* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
*Open prediction


- Tell Ss they are going to read a page in a


newspaper giving some recycling facts to protect the
environment .



- Ask them to look at the board and guess what they
are going to read .


+ What do people do with used things ?
+ What can they make from them ?


- Call on some Ss to read their guesses on the board
Car ties -> …………..


Milk bottles ->………
Glass -> …………..
Drink cans -> …………..


Ss the topic about the


environment and there are 12
hidden words .


Group work of 4 teams


Ss to write their answers on a
piece of paper and hand in when
they finish


Ss the group with the most right
words is the winner .


T – Ss


Whole class



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>Unit 10: Recycling</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 62</b>


<b>lesson 4 : Write</b>



<b>A /Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a set of instructions, using</b>
the sequencing .


Develop Ss’ Writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: infinitive, Conj: first, next, then, after that, finally.


<b>III.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures. drawing,</b>
mime , picture


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>II. Checking up:</b>



- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 149 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
* Warm up : Lucky numbers


- Write 9 numbers on he board from 1 to 9
1. Lucky number


2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people speak
English everywhere “


3. Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons are
liked by most children “


4. Lucky number
5. Lucky number


6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We do not
use things carefully . “


7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are candies
liked by the children ? “


8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr Han
teaches Maths . “



9. Say this sentence in the passive “ Vegetables do
not eat meat . “


- Divide the class into 2 teams .


* Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss


1. Pre-teach vocabulary :


- to soak : put sth in liquid for a time so that it
becomes completely wet .


- to mash : mime


- wire mesh (n) : luoi dien
- bucket (n) : drawing
-> Have Ss copy down .


* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board
*. Ordering prediction :


- Set the scene : tell Ss they are going to read a
text about how to recycle used paper .


- Put the verbs on the board randomly in a flow
chart


- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict the order of
the actions



<b>soak dry pull out mix press </b>
<b>mash </b>


1………. 2 ………. 3 ……..
4 ……… 5 ………. 6


…………


- Call on about 2 pairs to write their answers on
the board .


- Explain the process of recycling , using mimes
or Vietnamese and correct .


- Feedback


<b> 1. soak 2. mash 3. mix. 4. pull out 5. press 6. </b>
<b>dry</b>


Team work


Listen and copy


Teacher – Ss
Team work


Teacher


Group work of 4/ 5 Ss


Individual


Individual


Group work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<b>Unit 10: Recycling</b>


<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>


<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 63</b>


<b>Lesson 5 : Language focus</b>



<b>A / Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in Present </b>
simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: Passive form, a noun clause: “ It’s + adj + to V”.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 </b>
cardboards .


<b>B/ Procedure: </b>



<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up :- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. </b>
And then T corrects and give them marks.


III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : Questions game


- Call on a student to go to the board and give him or
her a job name .


- Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking
yes-no questions


- The chosen student can only answer yes or no
- Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a
point and take the place of the last chosen student .
Example questions :


- Do you get a big salary ?
- Do you wear uniform ?
* Language focus


* The passive forms


1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple
S + am / is / are + past participle



=> It is used when the subject is affected by the action
of the verb .


*Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :


+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the
pictures to put them in the correct order according to
the instructions


+ Call on some groups to give their answers .


Individual


Teacher – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

+ Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6
- Writing :


+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to
the board and write their sentences


+ Correct and give feedback


1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple
<b>S + will / shall + be + past participle</b>
- Have Ss copy down



- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in
the gaps , using the Passive


- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct
1. … will be shown


2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished …. 4.
Will … be made … ?


*. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun
<b>clause </b>


2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive


Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
*Complete the sentences


- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the
dialogues


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and
correct


2.2 . S + be + adj + that / noun clause


Example : We are delighted that you passed the
English exam .


- Get Ss to copy .


*Complete the letter


- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .


A B Key


1. relieved (a)
2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)


a. xin chuc mung
b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom


1.d
2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary


- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using
the words in the box


- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct.


<b>* Exercises:</b>
0. are delighted


1. was happy


Pair work


Teacher – Ss


Individual


Whole class


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

2. am relieved
3. is afraid


4. Are … sure …
5. am certain


- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud .
<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :


1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,<sub>s </sub>


grandparents are delighted that he passed his English


exam ……”


2. Do the exercises in the workbook .


Read the letter aloud
Listen and copy


<i><b>Teaching :</b></i>


<b>Period 65 . </b>


<b> </b>

<b>REVISION</b>



<b>A/ The aims: </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unite 10.
- Develop Ss’ four skills.


<b>II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .</b>


<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>



<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up: </b>


-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.
- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson:



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>* GRAMMAR:</b>


<b>* The passive forms :</b>



<b>* Passive Form in the present Simple: </b>


<b>S + am/ is / are + Past participle</b>


- It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the
verb .


- How to change an active sentence to a passive voice :
Active S V O


Passive S + be + PII by O
eg : I love you


You are loved by me
Have Ss copy


*Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :


+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures
to put them in the correct order according to the


instructions



+ Call on some groups to give their answers .
+ Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6
<b>* Writing : </b>


+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the
board and write their sentences


+ Correct and give feedback


1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple


<b>S + will / shall + be + past participle</b>
- Have Ss copy down


- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the
gaps , using the Passive


- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct


Individual


Teacher – Ss


Work with a partner
Pair work


- Ss to read the instructions and
look at the pictures to put them in


the correct order according to
theinstructions


- Ss to rewrite the sentences in the
passive form


Pair work


Teacher – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

1. … will be shown / 2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished … 4. Will … be made … ?


*. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause
2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive


Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
*Complete the sentences


- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and
correct


|Give model sentences:


<i><b>I am pleased that you want to know more</b></i>


- Have Sts read again in choral and individual.
. Concept check:Meaning / Use / form…



- Form: <b>S + tobe + adj + that – clause.</b>
- Use: Adj followed by a noun clause


|<b>She / happy / I passed my exam.</b>
|<b> They / sure / he will come here.</b>
|<b> It / good / we reduce the garbage.</b>


2.2 .(S + be + adj + that / noun clause )


Example : We are delighted that you passed the English
exam .


- Get Ss to copy .
*Complete the letter


- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .


A B Key


1. relieved (a)
2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)


a. xin chuc mung
b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom


1.d


2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary


- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the
words in the box


- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct.


- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud .
<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :


1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,<sub>s grandparents</sub>


are delighted that he passed his English exam ……”
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .


Whole class


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Whole class


Ss to read the letter and match the


words


Individual


Ss to give their answers
Read the letter aloud


Ss to read the complete letter
aloud


Listen and copy


ss to work in pairs to complete the
letter using the words in the box
- Retell the main points of this
lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>Unit 11</b>



<b>Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<i><b>Preparing: </b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 64</b>


<b>lesson 1 : Getting started</b>


<b>Listen and read.</b>



<b>A / Objectives: </b>



<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some expressions to express</b>
their interest .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Traveling words.


2. Grammar: I’d like to……? Would you mind + V-ing/ If….. did?


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.</b>
<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

- T. corrects and give them marks.
<b>III. New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : Jumbled words


- Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board


Ha long bay Nha Rong harbor


- Ask each team to connect the words to make the
right phrases for places of interest and write them on
the board as fast as possible



=> Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple
Literature , Nha rong Harbor .


* Getting Started :


- Ask Ss to open their books and match the names
with the pictures


- Call on some Ss to give their answers
a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor
c. The Temple Literature


d. Ha Long Bay


- Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud .
* Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .


*. Pre- teach Vocabulary :


- Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is
grown in one season .


- Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar )
- Water buffalo (n) : con trau


- forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes
Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N


Ex : a3 – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old –


boy


* Checking vocabulary : Bingo
+. Guiding questions :


- Set the scene and put the chart with questions on the
board


a. where does Hoa meet The Jones ?


b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet
Nam?


c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ?


d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ?
e. What would Tim like to do ?


Team work


Watch EL TV


Individual


Listen and copy
Teacher – Ss


individual and choral


Whole class


Individual
Pair work


Ss to think about the questions
in a few minutes


Ss listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue


Ss to work in pairs to answer the


<b>Places of interest</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

- Ask Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes
- Have Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue
- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to give their answers


- Feedback :


a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport
b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi


d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies
, corn and sugar cane fields


e. He would like to take a photo .
* While – reading :


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False


- Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to
answer , then have them correct the false sentences
and get them to write in their notebooks .


a. T b. T d. T e . T
c. F -> … in a taxi


f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes
are grown around Ha Noi .


- Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue
in front of class


- Correct their pronunciation


* Post – reading : Discussion


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with
them and ask them to pick out the sentences
containing the situations mentioned below .
* to express interest :


- I,<sub>d like you to meet my parents ….</sub>


- It is nice to meet you ….
- It is great to be in Viet Nam .
- I would to sit with Tim …..
* to express a request :


- Would you mind sitting in the front seat …


- Would you mind if I took a photo ?


<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
*/ Homework :


1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to
give some examples .


2. Do the exercises in the workbooks .


questions


Whole class


Ss to listen to the tape and say
out True or False


some groups of five to practice
the dialogue in front of class


Individual


Ss to read the dialogue again ,
discuss with them and ask them
to pick out the sentences


containing the situations
mentioned below .


Individual


- Retell the main points of this
lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<b>Unit 11</b>



<b>Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>
<i><b>Teaching: </b></i>


<b>Period 65</b>


<b>Lesson 2 : speak and language focus 3,4.</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to formal </b>
requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions .


- Develop Ss’ speaking skills.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Place direction.
2. Grammar: Formal request.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD, a mapped dialogue </b>
chart ..



<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have just seen </b>
from memory .


=> T corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson :


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : What does it say ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

of the class with his / her back to the board so that
he / she can not see what is written on the board .
- Write the information on the board .


- Ask the rest of the class try to help the student guess
what is written on the board by asking questions until
he / she says out right the words on the board .


Example : Yes, I do .


Ss ask : Do you like your teacher ?
Or Every day


Ss ask : How often do you have a shower ?


* Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking


and some structures


1. Pre- teach structures :
- Set the scene :


Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr.
Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue
and elicit the sentences from Ss .


<b>Model sentences : </b>


1. A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the
taxi?


B : No problem .


2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ?
B : Not at all .


=> Used to make and respond to formal requests
<b>Form : </b>


<b>1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …?</b>
2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple)
<b>…? </b>


<b> Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple ) ..? </b>
<b>Responses : </b>


 Agreement:



No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at
all . / Please do . / Please go head .


 Disagreement :


I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible
I,<sub>d prefer you did not . / I</sub>,<sub>d rather you did not . </sub>


- Get Ss to copy and give some more examples with
suggested words


2. Cardboard Drill :


1. move your car ? (v ) / 2. go out with me ? ( x)
3. wait for me ? (x) / 4. Get / coffee ? (v) / 5. Smoke ?
(x)


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
*/ While – speaking :


Whole class


Teacher – Ss


Ss of the exchanges between
Hoa and Mr. Jones and
between Hoa and Tim in the
last dialogue and elicit the
sentences from Ss .



Ss to copy and give some
more examples with suggested
words


Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

- Ask Ss to work in pairs


+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the
exchanges


+ Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the
exchanges


- Give feedback
Mapped dialogue


You Tourist officer


Excuse me !


I would like to visit a
market. Would you
mind suggesting one ?
That sounds


interesting . Thank
you .



Yes ?
Not at all .


How about goping to
Thai Binh Market ?
It opens from about
5 am to pm .


You are welcome .
+ Open pairs: Ask some pairs to demonstrate the
dialogue.


+ Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the
information / 101 to practice other dialogues .


Group 1 : Markets Group 2 : Museums
Group3 : Restaurants Group 4 : Stamps
Group 5 : Zoo and Botanical Garden
* Post – speaking :


- Call on some volunteers from each group to practice
in front of class .


- Rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books
<b>* Consolidation: </b>


* Language focus 3 :
+ Presentation :


- Ask Ss to repeat the models sentences :



Would you mind if + Verb ( in Past simple tense …) ?
Do you mind if + Verb ( in present simple tense …) ?
Do you mind / would you mind + verb – ing …?
+ Agreement :


No , I do not mind . / No , of course not . / Not at
all . / Please do . / Please go ahead .


- Disagreement :


I,<sub>d prefer you did not . / I</sub>,<sub>d rather you did not . </sub>


=> Meaning : Xin ban cam phien …
- Get Ss to copy .


b) Practice : Cardboard Drill


- Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including checks (v)
and crosses (x)


Ss to work in pairs


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Pair work


some volunteers from each
group to practice in front of


class .


-Retell the main points of this
lesson.


Individual


Teacher – Ss


+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs
to demonstrate in the class.


Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

a. move / car (v) c. get / coffee (x)
b. put out / cigarette (v) d. wait / moment (x)
Model : T : Would you mind moving your car ?
<b> Ss : No , of course not . </b>


- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it and correct .


+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the
class.


+ Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice
- Go on until the last cue


*. language focus 4 :
+ Gap fill



- Put the gap – fill chart on the board .


- Ask Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the
gaps .


<b>turned off – explain – telling – ask</b>


1. Would you mind …… me something about it ?
2. Do you mind if I …… you a question ?


3. Would you please …. this new word to me ?
4. Would you mind if I ….. the television ?


Answer Key : 1.telling 2.ask 3.explain 4. turned off
+ Ordering pictures


- Ask Ss to write the numbers and look at the


pictures , listen to the situations and order the pictures
( 1-> 6 )


1. turn on the stereo 2. watch TV while eating
3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting
5. turn on the air – conditioner 6. smoke


- Ask Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e
6.b


- Get Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to
demonstrate the exchanges based on the models


below the pictures .


Listen and correct their mistakes .
-Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :


1. Do the exercises in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Teacher – Ss
Pair work
Individual
Whole class


Ss to work in pairs , playing
the roles to demonstrate the
exchanges based on the
models below the pictures .
Listen and correct their
mistakes .


Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b>Unit 11</b>



<b>Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>



<b>Period 66.</b>


<b>lesson 3 : Listen + language focus 1, 2.</b>



<b>A / Objectives:</b>


<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen and match the places in the</b>
box to their correct positions on the map . Ss will be able to use Present and Past participles to
describe things and people.


<b>II. Language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: - ed and - ing participles.


<b>II. Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan. posters,pictures and a </b>
chart.


<b>B/ Procedures: </b>
<b>I . Organization: </b>


- Greeting and checking attendance.
<b>II. Checking up:</b>


Two Ss go to the board to make the similar dialogue about to send a letter or parcel.
- T corrects and give them marks.


III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>



* Warm up : Quiz what is this place ?


- Ask questions and call the student who puts his / her
hand up first to answer


- Tell Ss each place consists of 3 questions ; 3 points
for the first question , 2 points for the second question
, 1 point for the third question .


<i><b>a. What is this place ? </b></i>


1. it is called the city of Eternal Spring .
2. It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes .


3. You can find the most kinds of flowers here .
<i><b>b. What is this place ? </b></i>


1. It is a seaside resort .


Individual


Ss each place consists of 3
questions ; 3 points for the first
question , 2 points for the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

2. It has a very big monument of Buddha .
3. It has an Oceanic Institute


<i><b>c. What is this place</b></i><b> ? </b>



1. It is a mountainous resort .
2. It has tribal villages .


3. Sometimes it has snow .
<i><b>d. What is this place ? </b></i>


1. It is recognized as a World Heritage Site by
UNESSCO.


2. It has a lot of caves .


3. It contains of a lot of islands .
<b>*Key : </b>


a. Da Lat b. Nha Trang c. Sa Pa d. Ha Long Bay
=> Lead in the new lesson .


* Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words


+. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- Highway ( n)


- Tourist information center (n)


+. Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around
Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5
places in the maps . Listen to them and match the
places to the correct positions on the maps “


- Have Ss guess their correct positions on the map
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board.


* While – listening :


- Ask Ss to list the places on the maps .
- Play the tape 2 or 3 times


- Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the
correct answers


<b>Answer key : </b>


a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station
d) pagoda e) temple


- Play the tape once more to check the answers
( pause at some important paragraph )


* Post – listening :


- Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape .
- Correct their pronunciation


<b>* Language focus 1+2:</b>
<b>1. Language focus 1 : </b>


- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture /


108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the


Individual


Ss guess their correct positions
on the map


Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board.


Teacher – Ss
Whole class
Work in group
Individual


Pair work
Individual


Ss to open their books and look
at the picture / 108 and set the
scene “ It is time for recess and
the people at Quang Trung
school are in the school yard .
What are they doing ? “


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard .
What are they doing ? “


- Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct .
T : What is Mr Quang doing ?



Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs .
T : What is Miss Lien doing ?


Ss : She is carrying a bag .
……


 Model sentences :


The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang
( present participle phrase )


Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle
Use : A present participle can be used as an
adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning
- Have Ss copy


* Practice :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is ,
using the information above


<b>Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr </b>
Quang


- Correct and feedback
<b>2. Language focus 2 : </b>
* Matching


- Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the


picture / 109 to do the matching


<b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>Key</b>


1. box
2. truck
3. lamp
4. doll
5. flowers
6. toys


a. wrap in
b. dress in


c. recycled from
d. keep in


e. made in
f. paint
1. f
2. c
3. e
4. b
5. a
6. d
- Ask Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer
the questions :


- Where is the old lamp made in ?
- What color is the box painted ?


- What is truck recycled from ?
- What color is the doll dressed in ?
- What are the flowers wrapped in ?
- Where are the toys kept ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions


Listen and copy .


Ss to open their books and look
at the picture / 108 and set the
scene “ It is time for recess and
the people at Quang Trung
school are in the school yard .
What are they doing ?


Ss to look at the words in the
box and the picture / 109 to do
the matching


Ss to look at the picture / 109
again and answer the questions :


some pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions


Ss to look at their books , listen
to the questions and answer
Ss to work in pairs , asking and


answering the questions ( Using
the information in the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

=> Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ?
Model Sentences :


The old lamp made in China is five dollars .
( past participle phrase )


Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle
Irregular verb


Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to
qualify a noun with passive meaning .


- Have Ss copy
* Practice :


- Ask Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions
and answer


* T : How much is the box painted green ?
St: The box painted green is one dollar


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the
questions ( Using the information in the matching )
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class .
<b>* Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main points.


* Homework :


1. Learn by heart new words .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


- Call on some pairs to
demonstrate for the class .
Retell the main points of this
lesson.


Individual


- Ss copy down.


<b>Unit 11</b>



<b>Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<i><b>Preparing: </b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<b>lesson 4 : Read .</b>



<b>A / Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get the information from </b>
simple tourist advertisements .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>



1. Vocabulary: tourist vocabulary.
2. Grammar: Ed/ ing participles.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . pictures ,</b>
drawing .


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up :</b>


- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson.
-T corrects and give them marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 167 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
* Warm up : Word square


Tourist sites


<b>A</b> <b>D</b> <b>D</b> <b>Y</b> <b>R</b> <b>E</b> <b>S</b> <b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>T</b>


<b>D</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>T</b> <b>G</b> <b>B</b> <b>E</b> <b>A</b> <b>C</b> <b>H</b>


<b>K</b> <b>N</b> <b>L</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b> <b>S</b> <b>A</b> <b>P</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b>


<b>B</b> <b>U</b> <b>A</b> <b>I</b> <b>M</b> <b>K</b> <b>S</b> <b>A</b> <b>P</b> <b>C</b>



<b>A</b> <b>H</b> <b>T</b> <b>B</b> <b>V</b> <b>B</b> <b>I</b> <b>P</b> <b>J</b> <b>I</b>


<b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>S</b> <b>L</b> <b>D</b> <b>K</b> <b>I</b> <b>T</b>


<b>H</b> <b>L</b> <b>N</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>K</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>T</b> <b>A</b>


<b>M</b> <b>O</b> <b>U</b> <b>N</b> <b>T</b> <b>A</b> <b>I</b> <b>N</b> <b>R</b> <b>D</b>


<b>A</b> <b>N</b> <b>H</b> <b>A</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>A</b> <b>N</b> <b>G</b> <b>E</b>


<b>A</b> <b>G</b> <b>G</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>G</b> <b>X</b> <b>C</b> <b>U</b> <b>L</b>


*Answer Key :


resort , beach , Sa Pa , caves , lakes
mountains , Nha Trang


Bach Ma , Ha Long , Da lat , Tribe
Seaside , The citadel


*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .


+ Pre – teach vocabulary :


- accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in
- giant (adj ) = huge / very big


- slope (n)



- jungle (n) = a very thick forest
- limestone (n) = da voi


- florist (n) : a person who sells flowers
- to import >< to export


+ Checking vocabulary : What and where
*/ While – reading :


* Grid :


- Ask Ss to read the advertisements about the resorts
and check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid


- Call on some Ss to give their answers
Answer Key :


<b>+ Nha Trang : Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels , </b>
local transport , tourist attractions .


<b>+ Da Lat : Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , tourist</b>
attractions


<b>+ Sa Pa : Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes </b>
tourist attractions , villages .


<b>+ Ha Long Bay : World Heritage , tourist </b>


attractions , sand beaches , railways , hotels , caves ,
locals transport .



- Have Ss copy down
*. Matching :


- put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match the
words or phrases in Column A to column B


Team work


Ss to find 13 hidden words and
write them on a piece of paper .


Individual


Teacher – Ss


Whole class
Individual
Pair work


Ss to read the advertisements
about the resorts and check (v)
the topics mentioned in the grid
Ss to work in pairs to compare
their answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<b>Unit 11</b>



<b>Traveling around Viet Nam</b>




<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 68.</b>


<b>Lesson 5: write</b>



<b>A / Objectives: </b>


<b>I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a narrative , </b>
using a guided composition .


Develop Ss’ Writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: The simple tense; Conjunctions; adverbs of time.
<b>III. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters.</b>


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .</b>
<b>II. Checking up:</b>


- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.


<b>III. New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up : Which word ?


( Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap
fill )


- Put the missing words on the board and have Ss
study first :written – climax – attention – brief –
<b>events</b>


- Show the chart and ask Ss to ill in the gaps with the
words in the box .


- Ask Ss of each group to go to the board and write
the words as fast as possible .


- Explain the definition in Vietnamese
Answer key :


1. events 2. written 3. climax 4. attention 5. brief
* Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach Vocabulary
- canoe (n) : using picture


- to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n)
- to hire : thue muon



- to overturn : lat up / lat do


Group work of 4/5 Ss


Ss of each group to go to the
board and write the words as
fast as possible .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- to rescue = to save somebody ,<sub>s life from danger </sub>


+ Get Ss to copy down .


* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board
*. Ordering statements : Setting the scene “ Last
<i>week , while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family </i>
<i>had quite an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong</i>
<i>Lake . What did they do and what happened to them ?</i>
<i>“ </i>


- Ask Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and
rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story .
- Get some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and
correct pronunciation errors .


- Give feedback : c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e
*While – writing :


1. Explanation :


- Have Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess


the meaning of the new words .


- Explain the meanings of these words


+ to stumble : truot chan / + to go off : vang ra
+ to realize : nhan ra


- Get Ss to copy


2. Ordering pictures :Ask Ss to look at the pictures
again and rearrange the events in the correct


chronological order to make it a story.


- Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct .
- Give feedback : d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g
3. Write – it – up :


- Ask Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and
the given words to write the story about Uyen .


- Monitor and help Ss with words or structures while
they are writing .


* Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a
narrative .


- Ask them to exchange their writings to correct for
each other .



- Call on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class
- Give feedback :


Uyen had a day to remember last week . she had
<i>a math exam on Friday but she got up late . She </i>
<i>realized her alarm clock did not go off . As he was </i>
<i>leaving home , it started to rain heavily . Uyen tried </i>
<i>to run as fast as she could . Suddenly she stumbled </i>
<i>against a rock and fell onto the road . Her school bag</i>
<i>went into a pool of water and everything got wet . </i>


Ss


Teacher – Ss
Whole class
Teacher – Ss


some pairs to give their answers
and correct .


Ss to read the story aloud for the
class and correct pronunciation
errors .


Pair work


Ss to look at the pictures again
and rearrange the events in the
correct chronological order to
make it a story



Teacher – Ss
Whole – class
Individual
Individual


Ss to demonstrate the completed
story in front of class .


Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<i>Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her </i>


<i>classroom . Luckily , Uyen had enough time to finish </i>
<i>her exam . </i>


* Post – writing :


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story
in front of class .


- Copy the story in their notebooks .


<b>* Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this </b>
lesson.


* Homework :


1. Learn by heart all new words and copy in their
notebooks .



2. Work in groups of 4 writing a story to tell the class
in the next lesson .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Individual
Individual


<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 69. </b>


<b> </b>

<b>Consolidation.</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b>I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present and Past participles </b>
to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would /
Do you mind + V-ing …? “


Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 11.


- Develop Ss’ four skills.


<b>II. language contents: </b>
1. Vocabulary:
2. Grammar:


<b>II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .</b>
<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>



<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up: </b>


-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.
- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<i>Giáo án Anh8 Năm học : 2011 - 201 2 </i>


<i>Vũ Thế Phong 172 Nam Nghia Secondery School</i>
<b>Teachers activities</b> <b>Studentsactivities</b>
* Warm up Memory game


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 109 carefully for 20
seconds and close their books .


- Tell them the team having the most right words is
the winner .


Answer Key :


box , lamp truck , flowers , elephant , bear , rabbit
*Language focus


+. Language focus 1 :
* Pre-teach :


- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture /
108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the
people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard .


What are they doing ? “


- Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct .
T : What is Mr Quang doing ?


Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs .
T : What is Miss Lien doing ?


Ss : She is carrying a bag .
T : ( Nam )


Ss : ( standing next to Miss Lien / talking to Miss
Lien )


T : ( Ba )


Ss : ( sitting under the tree / reading a book )
T : ( Lan )


Ss : ( standing by the table )
T : ( Nga and Hoa )


Ss : ( playing chess )
 Model sentences :


The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang
( present participle phrase )


Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle
Use : A present participle can be used as an


adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning
- Have Ss copy


* Practice :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is ,
using the information above


<b>Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr </b>
Quang


- Correct and feedback
2. Language focus 2 :


* Pre –teach : Matching


- Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the
picture / 109 to do the matching


<b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>Key</b>


Whole class
Team work


Ss open their books again , go
through the words and correct .


Ss to answer then correct
Whole class



Teacher – Ss


Choral -> individual


Ss to work in pairs to say who
each person is , using the
information above .


Whole class


Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

<i><b>Preparing: </b></i>
<i><b>Teaching:</b></i>


<b>Period 70. </b>

<b>Test( no 3 )</b>



<b>A / The aims : </b>


<b>I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form </b>
unit 9 to unit 11 so that they can supplement what they are short of . (to do the test well ).
<b>II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test.</b>


<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>
<b>I. Organization:</b>
<b>II. Checking up: </b>


<b>III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson . </b>
- Deliver the test papers to Ss .



I / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2,5 ps)
1. Would you mind if I ( take ) ……… a photo ?


2. Would you mind ( help ) ……… her to finish her homework ?
3. Do you mind if we ( get ) ………. a taxi to town ?


4. The cars ( make ) ……… from Japan are the best .
5. The man ( talk ) ……… to your teacher is my uncle .
II / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps )


1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind ………?


2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind ……….?
3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge ……….


4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ………
III / Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase : ( 2,0 ps )
1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus .


2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English .
3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle .


4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city center .
IV / Complete the sentences , using the given words or phrases : ( 1,5 ps )
1. Last year class 11 A / have / terrible experience.


2. One weekend / they decide / go / a picnic / Cuc Phuong National Park .
3. They / get out of / bus / lunch / because everybody / very hungry .


<b>V / Listen </b>.You are going to listen to Lily talking about her self . You are going to listen twice .


Check (v) the correct box for True or False ( 2,0 Ps )


<b>Statements</b> <b>True False</b>


1 Lily comes from China


2 English is important to her as she will need it for her future job
3 She started learning English when she was eighteen .


4 She has a problem with listening .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

6 She does not find English difficult to learn .
7 She wants to be an English teacher .


8 She loves English songs , but she does not hope to become a
singer .


Tapescrift :


Hi ! my name is Lily . I come from China . I am a student , a university student . I am
eighteen years old . I am studying English as a foreign language . English is important to me
because I will need ot for my job in the future . I began learning English when I was very young
– at the age of eight . I think that my biggest problem is listening . People speak very quickly , so
I can not understand them . English is really hard for me to learn , but I like it . I want to be an
English teacher ; or I hope to become a singer one day because I love English songs very much .


<i><b>The end</b></i>



<i><b>Teaching:.</b></i>



period 70.

<b>TEST </b>

<b>(45min)</b>



<b>ENGLISH 8 (No 3)</b>



<b>I.)Circle the best answer: (3ps).</b>



1.I open my book in ……….. to read.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

2.You should cool the burn………..


a)immediately b)immediate c)immediating.
3.What time ………. Lan be here.?


a)is b)shall c)will.
4. She will be here ……… three hours.


a)for b)in c)on.
5. Do you want to listen ……….. the radio.?


a)at b)to c)for.


6. Thank you very much for the commics you ………..me last week.
a)send b)sending c)sent .


<b>II.)Choose one of two options to complete the following sentences : (3ps)</b>



1.The glasses ( breaking / broken )last night are mine.


2. I ( glad /am glad )that you want to know more about the subject .
3. Would you mine if I ( turn on / turned on ) the T.V ?



4. The boy ( punished / punishing ) by the teacher is Nam.
5. Do you mine ( opening the window /open the window ) ?
6. They will be ( finished / finishing ) before lunar new year.


III /

<b>Supply the correct form of the verbs</b>

: ( 2 ps)



1. Would you mind ( help ) ……… her to finish her homework ?
2. Do you mind if we ( get ) ………. a taxi to town ?


3. The cars ( make ) ……… from Japan are the best .
4. The man ( talk ) ……… to your teacher is my uncle .


IV /

<b>Rewrite these sentences as directed</b>

: ( 2,0 ps )



1. The children eat all the vegetables and meat .


=> All the vegetable ………
2.He will build a new house there.=>


A new house ………


<b>Unit 12</b>



<b>A Vacation abroad</b>



<i><b>Preparing:</b></i>
<i><b>Teaching: </b></i>
<b>Period 71. </b>



<b>Lesson 1 : Getting started</b>


<b>Listen and read</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<b>I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of how to make accept </b>
and decline invitations .


<b>II. Language contents: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Voc about traveling.


2. Grammar: Progressive tenses with always.


<b>III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan , Pictures , chart</b>
( true / false )


<b>B/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.</b>
- T. corrects and give them marks.


<b>III. New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up :


+. Guessing game ( Getting started )



- Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to
guess what country it is .


- Feedback :


a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand
d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan


+. Chatting :


T :Where do you want to visit among these countries?
Ss: ………..


T : Why ?


Ss : ………


*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


+. Pre – teach Vocabulary :
- to include : bao gom , gom co


- to come over : to come to Someone,<sub>s house to visit </sub>


for a short time


- to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to
drive him / her to a place



- abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country
-> to be / go / travel / live abroad


* Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember
+. True / False Prediction


- Set the scene “ Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for a
vacation . She is ringing her friend , Mrs Smith , to
tell her about the trip . “


- Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the
statements


a. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in


Individual


Ss to guess what country it is .


- Copy down new lesson.


Teacher – Ss


Whole class
Teacher


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

San Francisco .


b. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to


stay with her while they are in town .


c. Mrs Quyen does not accept Mrs smith,<sub>s invitation </sub>


because she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of
hers .


d. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for
3 days .


e. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs
Smith,<sub>s place for dinner one night .</sub>


f. Mr Thanh ; Mrs Quyen,<sub>s husband , goes abroad for </sub>


a business meeting .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements
are true or false .


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


* While – reading


<b>+. Checking predictions :</b>


- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue .



- Call on some Ss to correct the false statements .
1. False -> Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Ha
Noi


2. True


3. False -> … because her accommodation is included
in her tickets price .


4. True


5. False -> Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs
Smith ,<sub>s .</sub>


6. True


<b>+. Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen </b>,<sub>s schedule </sub>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs
to complete the grid with the information taken from
the dialogue .


- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the
information in the grid on the board .


Date Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thu 28
Schedule coming
to San
Francisco
Going


out
Having
dinner
with the
Smiths
Leaving
San
Francisco
- Have Ss copy


+. Comprehension Questions


- Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the


- Some Ss to read their


predictions and write them on
the board .


Pair work
Teacher – Ss


Individual


Whole class
Pair work


- Ss to read the dialogue again
and work in pairs to complete
the grid with the information


taken from the dialogue .
- Some Ss to go to the board to
write the


- Ss to look at their books and
answer the questions


- Individual


- Ss compare their answers
with their partner


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

questions .


- Let Ss compare their answers with their partner.
- Call on some Ss to answer


- Give feedback and correct
Answer key :


a) No , they won,<sub>t . Because they are coming on a tour</sub>


, and their accommodation is included in the ticket
price , so they will stay at the hotel .


b) No , he won,<sub>t . Because he will have a business </sub>


meeting in the evening that day .


c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel .


- Get Ss to copy .


*/ Post – reading :


 Grammar Awareness


- Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the
statements indicating the following situations


1. Making an invitation
2. Accepting an invitation
3. Declining an invitation
4. Making a complaint


- Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy .
1. Would you like to come and stay with us … ?
.. you must come over for dinner one night .


2. Ye , we ,<sub>d love to but we will only be in town for </sub>


three nights .


3. That is very kind of you but we are coming on a
tour ..


4. Oh . dear . He is always working.
<b>* Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :



1. Learn by heart new words and structures to give
some more examples .


2. Do the exercises in the workbook
3. Prepare the next lesson .


- Ss to read the dialogue again
and pick out the statements
indicating the following
situations


Whole class
Pair work


Ss to give their answers and
have Ss copy .


- Retell the main points of this
lesson.


- Copy down homeworks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<b>UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD</b>



<b>Part : SPEAK AND LISTEN </b>



<b>I/. Objectives: After this period, students are able </b>:


know the way to talk about planning a tour and get acquainted with word relating to the


topic


listen to the weather reports and get acquainted with some structures and words used in the
weather reports


<b>II/. Knowledge</b>
<i><b>1.Language knowledge</b></i>
<i><b> 1.1 Vocabulary : </b></i>


1.2 Grammar :
1.3 Pronunciation


<i><b>2.Skills : Listening , speaking, reading and writing</b></i>
Techniques :pairwork , groupwork


<i><b>3.Teaching method : Communicative approach </b></i>


<i><b> 4.Visual aids : textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard </b></i>
<b>III/. Steps of teaching </b>


1.Greetings


2.Checking attendance


3.Reviewing the previous lesson


Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary


4. New lesson



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>* Warm up:</b>


<b>- T asks Ss play “jumbled words” about the name if cities in</b>
America


+ Ewn rkyo + cgohaic
+ wonshaingt + Sol ngaegel
<b>a. Pre – speaking:</b>


- T introduces some ways to do exercise


- T asks Ss to look at the brochures and flight information
- T introduces some new words


+ via + rate per night + single/ double
+ facilities + gym + business center
<b>b. While - speaking:</b>


- T guides Ss to complete your itinerary


-How many flights a week?


-Can you take from Los Angeles to Boston?
-Which flight do you take everyday of the week?
-Which of hotel is cheaper?


-How much is a double room in Revere Hotel?
-How about Atlantic Hotel?



- take part in the game
- write on the board
- listen


- look at their books
and listen


- listen and repeat,
then copy down


- complete the
itinerary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

-Where can you visit?


- T gives a model and hangs on the board
 Where shall we stay?


-> The Revere Hotel is very expensive but it has a gym
 Where should we visit?


-> I think we should visit Harvard Medical school and Art
Gallery.


 What time should we leave Los Angeles?


-> There is a daily flight at ten am. Would that be O.K?
- T calls Ss to practice the model



- T asks Ss to work in pairs
- T calls some pairs to check
- T gives comment.


<b>c. Post - speaking:</b>


- T asks Ss to practice with a situation


Make a plan for their summer holiday by filling the
information in their itinerary.


-Departure: (Hue ). . . . .


- Arrive: ( Ho Chi Minh city). . . .
- Accommodation: ( hotel ). . . .
- T calls some Ss to check and gives marks
<b>Listen:</b>


<b>a. Pre – listening:</b>


- T asks Ss to write “net words”


- T asks Ss to ask and answer the questions about the weather
+ What’s the weather like today?


+ What’s the weather like in spring?/ Summer …..?
+ What do you usually do in summer?


- T asks modal and asks Ss to work in pair


- T calls some pairs to check


- T introduces the lesson


- T asks Ss to read all the adjectives in the box
- T remarks the way to talk about the temperature


+ Minus degree
|+ zero degree
+ degree centigrade
<b>b. While - listening:</b>


- T guides Ss to do the exercise
- T plays the tape once


- practice in pair


- practice in pair
- pair work
- practice in pair
- free practice


- list the words


- answer
It’s hot/ cool/
It’s cool/….
I go swimming
- pair work
- practice in pair


- listen


- read
- take note
Weathe


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

- T plays the tape (three times)
- T asks Ss to compare the answers
- T calls some Ss to give the answers


- T plays the tape again and gives the correction.


<i>Answer keys.</i>


CITY WEATHER TEMPERATURE


LOW HIGH


1. Sydney
2. Tokyo
3. London
4. Bangkok
5. New York
6. Paris.


Dry - windy
Dry - windy
Humid - cold
Warm - dry
Windy - cloudy


Cold - dry


20 26


15 22


-3 7


24 32


8 15


10 16
<b>c. Post – Listening:</b>


- T asks Ss to play game: which is the best weather forecast?
- T devides class into small group to make weather report about
some bog cities in VN


- T calls some Ss to check and comments


- look at the table and
guess


- listen for


information


- listen and do the
exercise



- pair work


- give the answer


- work in pair
- practice in pairs
listen


- group work
- take note
<b>5.Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<b>UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD</b>



<b>Part : READ </b>



<b>I/. Objectives: After this period, students are able </b>:


know the way to talk about planning a tour and get acquainted with word relating to the
topic


listen to the weather reports and get acquainted with some structures and words used in the
weather reports


<b>II/. Knowledge</b>
<i><b>1.Language knowledge</b></i>
<i><b> 1.1 Vocabulary : </b></i>


1.2 Grammar :


1.3 Pronunciation


<i><b>2.Skills : Listening , speaking, reading and writing</b></i>
Techniques :pairwork , groupwork


<i><b>3.Teaching method : Communicative approach </b></i>


<i><b> 4.Visual aids : textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard </b></i>
<b>III/. Steps of teaching </b>


1.Greetings


2.Checking attendance


3.Reviewing the previous lesson


Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>* Warm up:</b>


- T guides Ss to play “hang man” game
NEWYORK


<b>a. Pre – reading:</b>


- T asks: do you remember Mrs. Quyen?
What plan did she have?



- T introduces the lesson


- T asks Ss to look at the pictures and guess which
places she visited


- T calls some Ss to give the answer


- T introduces some new words and their meaning
+ lava + volcano + pour out +
Fisherman’s wharf


+ Napa valley + carve


+ “The windy city” + on the shore of
+ State of Liberty + be situated
+ the Empire State Building


- T calls some Ss to read the words
<b>b. While - reading:</b>


<b> 1. Write what Mrs. Quyen did and saw …..</b>
- T guides Ss to do the exercise


- T asks Ss to read the post cards carefully
- T asks Ss to do the exercise


- T asks Ss to correct the answers with their friends
- T calls some Ss to give the answer


- T comments


<i>Answer key: </i>


a. Hawaii -> went swimming, visited Kilauea
Volcano.


b. New York -> went shopping and bought lots of
souvenirs.


c. Chicago -> saw Lake Michigan.


d. Mount Rushmore -> saw the heads of American
Presidents carved into the rocks.


e. San Francisco -> visited Fisherman’s Wharf, the
Napa Valley wine growing area and the Alcatraz
prison.


<b>2. Answer the questions.</b>


- T asks Ss to read the postcards again to answer the


- take part in the game


- answer
- listen


- look at pictures and guess
- give the answer


- listen and repeat, then


copy down


- read the words


- read the postcards
- do exercise


- compare


- give the answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

questions


- T calls some pairs to give the answer.
- T comments and gives the correction
<i>Answer key: </i>


a. She went there by plane.


b. She saw the famous prison on the island of
Alcatraz.


c. On Mount Rushmore ,there are the heads of
American Presidents carved into the rocks.
d. It’s “ The Windy City”


e. She was shopping while her husband was visiting
the Statue of Liberty.


<b>c. Post – Reading:</b>



- T calls some Ss to read aloud the postcards


- T check Ss’ pronunciation


- T asks: What do you know about the famous places
in the U.S.A ? Can you tell some famous places .


- read aloud
- answer in pair
- take note


<b>5.Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<b>UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD</b>



<b>Part : WRITE </b>



<b>I/. Objectives: After this period, students are able know how to write a postcard</b>
<b>II/. Knowledge</b>


<i><b>1.Language knowledge</b></i>
<i><b> 1.1 Vocabulary : </b></i>


1.2 Grammar :
1.3 Pronunciation


<i><b>2.Skills : Listening , speaking, reading and writing</b></i>
Techniques :pairwork , groupwork



<i><b>3.Teaching method : Communicative approach </b></i>


<i><b> 4.Visual aids : textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard </b></i>
<b>III/. Steps of teaching </b>


1.Greetings


2.Checking attendance


3.Reviewing the previous lesson


Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary


4. New lesson


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>* Warm up:</b>


- T guides Ss to play “Brainstorming”


Activities on holiday: sight seeing, ………
<b>a. pre – writing: </b>


- T asks: Have you ever sent a postcard to your friend or
relative?


What do you write on a postcard?
- T introduces the lesson



- T asks Ss to do the first exercise


<i><b>1. Complete the postcard Mrs. Quyen sent from the</b></i>
<i><b>USA.</b></i>


- T calls some Ss to read the post card aloud then write
the answer on the board


- T comments and gives the corrections


(1) in, (2) people, (3) weather , (4) visited , (5) her, (6)
nice /lovely, (7) bought , (8) for, (9) heaviness, (10) soon.
- T reminds Ss how to write a postcard


<b>b. While writing:</b>


- take part in the game
- list all things to do on
holiday


- answer
- listen


- do the exercise
- give the answer


- listen and notice


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

<i><b>2. Imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a certain</b></i>
<i><b>place/trip in Vietnam. Write a postcard to a friend</b></i>


<i><b>……… </b></i>


- T explains way to write a postcard by asking Ss to pay
attention to the information in exercise 2


- T asks Ss to write a postcard


- T calls some Ss to read their postcard
- T comments


<b>c. Post – Writing:</b>


- T reminds Ss way to write a postcard


<i>Answer: 1. well – good 2. friendship – friendly 3. wind</i>
– windy


4. visit – visited 5. his – her 6. spend – spent
7. to play – playing 8. bottle – bottles 9. are – is
10. buying – to buy


- write the postcard
- read their postcard
- listen and notice
- take note


<b>5.Homework:</b>


Write the postcard again
Correct errors in the postcard


Dear Nam,


We’re having a well time on CatBa Island. The people are very friendship and helpful. The
weather has been sunny and wind. In CatBa town, I visit my aunt, Mrs. Lien and his children. I
spend the whole morning to play with them. I bought lot of souvenirs and two bottle fish sauce.
Shopping here are wonderful. There are a lots things to buying.


See you soon.


Unit 12 :a vacation AbRoad



<i><b>Teaching date 14 / 3 / 2009.</b></i>



<b>Period 78. </b>


<b>Lesson 5 : language focus</b>



<b>A/ The aims: </b>



<b>I.Teaching points : </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using Past progressive
with While,When and progressive tenses with “always” to complain.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

<b>II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .</b>


<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>



<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II. Checking up: </b>


-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.


- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up:


- T prepares some cards with verbs of actions.
- One of Ss from each team goes to the front ,picks
up one card and mimes. Ss of the other team guess
what the mime represents and say what s/he was
doing at 10,00 last Sunday.


<b>Model sentences</b>


1. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o'clock last night
2. They were talking to each other at that time
* Form:


<b>S + Was/ were + V-ing…</b>



<i>Use: To indicate an action that was in progress at a</i>
<i>point of time in the past</i>


<i><b>* Picture Drill:</b></i>
1. Hoa/have dinner
2. Bao/ read a comic
3. Nga/ write a letter


4. Na/ walk with her dog


5.Lan and her gradma/ talk to each other
<b>Model sentences</b>


The Le family was sleeping when the mailman
came


The phone rang while Nga was eating
Form: Main clause + Adv clause


* Past progressive

<i><b>when</b></i>

<b>Past simple</b>
* Past simple

<i><b>while</b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>

<b>Past progressive</b>
->Key to LF2:


a - C b - F c - E
d - B e - D f - A
<b>Model sentence :</b>


Bao is always forgetting his homework


Whole class
Team work


Teacher – Ss


- Copy down new lesson.
- Work individually


- Look at the picture and do


exercises


- Work in pairs


- Some Ss to go to the board to do
exercises.


- Copy down new Grammar.
- Individual


Individual
Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

be adv V-ing…
* Form:


<b>S + to be + adv( always) + V_ing …</b>


The present progressive tense with “always”


The progressive tenses are used with always to
express a habitual action( usually bad habit as a
complaint)


** Ss do language focus 3 P.120
-> Key :


b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella


c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus
d. Nam is always watching T.V late



f. Na is always talking on the phone
g. Liem is always going out


- Complete all the exercises in the notebook
- Prepare well for the next period.


<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>* Homeworks: </b>


- Redo all exercises


- Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12.
- Prepare for next lesson.


some pairs practice each exchange
before going on to another


exchange .
Teacher –Ss


Ss to work in pairs , replacing the
information with the words in the
dictation list .


Pair work


Ss to open their books and read the


multiple choice questions


Individual


Some Ss Retell the main points of
this lesson.


Copy down homeworks


Unit 13 : festivals



<i><b>Teaching date 16 / 3 / 2009.</b></i>



<b>Period 79. </b>


<b>Lesson 1 : getting started </b>


<b> + listen and read</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

<b>I. Teaching points:</b>

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the rice


cooking festival and to understand the rice cooking festival in VN. Presenting vocab



<b>I . Teaching aids</b>

: Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.



<b>B/ Steps of the lesson: </b>



<b>I. Organizaton:</b>

-Greeting and checking attendance.



<b>II. Checking up:</b>

- Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.


- T. corrects and give them marks.




<b>III. New lesson: </b>



<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Ss’ activitives</b>


<b>*Getting started : Chatting</b>


1.Tom likes swimming and sunbathing.
Where should he go ? Why ?


2. David is interested in ancient cities  ?
3.Huckleberry likes mountain-climbing  ?
4. Oliver is keen on pottery  ?


5. Robinson is fond of crowed places  ?
<b>*Vocabulary</b>


- fetch (v) ®i lÊy, mang vỊ
- yell (v) hÐt to cỉ vị
- urge (v) thóc giơc
- rub (v) xo¸


- participate (v) tham gia
- award (v) tặng thởng
- teamate (n) đồng đội


- competition (n) cuộc tranh tài
- judge (n) Giám khảo


<i><b>* What and where.</b></i>



<b>* Listen and read : P.121</b>
<i><b>Pre- questions</b></i>


1.How many competitions in the rice-cooking
festival?


2. Do all team members go to the river to fetch
water?


Rice-cooking festival


Water fetching Fire making Rice-cooking
To fetch water To make fire To cook rice
* Matching :


The grand prize
The starting position
The husk


Mét mÈu tre
Vá trÊu
Gi¶i nhÊt


Chủ tịch hội đồng giám khảo


Group work of 4/5 Ss


-Some groups to give their answers
and correct



- Copy down new lesson.
- Repeat in chorus.


T – Ss
Whole class
Team work


- Ss to go to the board and write their
words.


Individual work
T – Ss


Students listen to the dialoge then
answer the questions


Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
T – Ss


Pair work


- Ss to write a story using the
information from the dialogue .
Individual work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

a piece of bamboo
The council leader


Điểm xuất phát



a. F b. F c. T d, F e. F f. T
<b>* Talk about the rice cooking festival:</b>
- Three competions


- The way to fetch the water to cook rice
- The way to make fire


- The rice cooking contest


- The way to decide the winner of the contest
<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>* Homeworks : </b>


Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook


- Prepare well for the next period


Ss work in pairs or in groups to
talk about the rice cooking
festival.


- Retell the main points.
- Listen and copy down
homeworks.


Unit 13 : festivals



<i><b>Teaching date 19 / 3 / 2009.</b></i>




<b>Period 80. </b>


<b>Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>



<b>A / The aims :</b>


<b>I. Teaching points</b>

:



By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make up a dialogue and talk about


preparations for another festival .( Giving Ss practice in talking about preparations


for some festivals in VN).



- Then listen to the conversation and fill in the gaps.


- Develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills.



<b>II. Teaching aids</b>

:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>


<b>I. Organization: </b>



<b>-</b>

Greeting and checking attendance.



<b>II. Checking up :</b>



- Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue of unit 13.


=> T corrects and give them marks.



<b>III. New lesson :</b>



<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>



<b>* Brainstorm :</b>


decorate/ clean/ paint the house/ the room- buy
cakes, candies, drink, food, fruits


- Cook special meals/ make cakes/ get/ buy new
dress


- Write/ send postcard to friends, relatives
<b>1. vocabulary</b>


-Pomergranate (n) Quả lựu
- Peach blossoms (n) Hoa đào
- Dried waterlemon seeds (n) Hạt da
-Marigolds (n) : Cúc vạn thọ


- Sticky rice balls : bánh trôi
Spring rolls : Bánh tết , chả giò.
* Checking up: Rubout and remember
* Ordering : (Speak P.123)


A  F B  G C  H D  J E  J
<b>Speaking :</b>


<i><b>* Make mini dialogue</b></i>


<b>Task 1: Decide who is going to do which</b>


S1. We are having a class festival next week. I'm


going to buy asome flowers


S2: I'm going to decorate the room with……
S3:Great, I'm going to………….


S4. I'm going to……


<b>Task 2: A day before the class festival</b>
S1: Have you bought flowers


S2: Ye, I bought them yesterday. What about
decorating the room


S3: ……….
<b>Listening :</b>


Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual


Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in chorus.


Individual
Pair work


Ss to work in pairs and give their
answers .



- Make a dialogue.
- Work in pairs


Some pairs practice each exchange
before going on to another exchange
.


Teacher –Ss


Ss to work in pairs , replacing the
information with the words in the
dictation list


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

<b>1. Gap fill : (Listen 1)</b>
<i><b>Answer key</b></i>


a. Mr Robinson/ flower market
b. traditional


c. dried watermelon seeds
d. make


<b>2. Complete the notes : </b>


Things to do
Mr


Robinson


Go to the flower market to buy


Peach blossoms and a bunch of
marigolds


Mrs
Robinson


Go to Mrs Nga's to learn how to
make spring rolls


Liz Go to the market to buy candies and<sub>a packet of dried watermelon seeds</sub>

<b>Consolidation:</b>



- Retell the main points of this lesson.


<b>Homeworks: </b>



- Learn by heart vocabulary


- Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook
- Prepare well for the next period


Pair work


Ss to open their books and complete
the notes.


Individual


Some Ss Retell the main points of
this lesson.



Copy down homeworks


Unit 13 : festivals



<i><b>Teaching date 21/ 3 / 2009.</b></i>



<b>Period 81. </b>


<b>Lesson 3 : read </b>



<b>A / The aims :</b>



<b>I . Teaching points : </b>

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in


the Present Simple



<b>II. Teaching aids</b>

: Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square


chart . pictures , drawing .



<b>B/ Steps of the lesson: </b>



<b>I. Organization:</b>

- Greeting and checking attendance.



<b>II. Checking up :</b>



- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson.


-T corrects and give them marks.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>



<b>** Chatting :</b>


1. When is Christmas held every year ?
(December 24th )


2. Do you celebrate Christmas ?
<b>*. Vocabulary</b>


- spread (v) (spread -spread) : Lan réng
- design (v) ThiÕt kÕ


- perform (v) performance (n) BiĨu diƠn, bi biểu
diễn


- The patron saint (n) Thánh bảo hộ
- a Carol (n) bài hát giáng sinh


- Jolly (adj) = happy and cheerful (adj) vui tÝnh.
* Checking up: Matching.


<b>* Read : P.124-125</b>


<b>* True/ Fasle statements :</b>


1. Christmas is an important festival in every country
in the world


2. The custom of decorating a tree first appeared in
Europe



3. The leaders of the church were unhappy with
Christmas carols when they were first ferformed
4. Sending Christmas cards was an American's idea
<i><b>-> Key : </b></i>


1. F (not every but many countries in the world)
2. T 3. T


4. F (an Englishman's)


<b>* Complete the grid : (Read 2 P.126)</b>
Christmas
specials
Place of
origin
Date
The Christmas
tree


Riga early 1500s
The Christmas


card


England mid 19th
century
Christmas
carol
no
information


800 years
ago


Santa Claus USA 1823


<b>* Comprehension questions: (Read 2 P.126)</b>
<i><b>->Key :</b></i>


a. More than a century ago


b. He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends
c. 800 years ago


d. An American professor named Clement Clarke
Moore


Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual


Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in chorus.


Individual
Pair work


Ss to work in pairs and give
their answers .



- Make a dialogue.
- Work in pairs


Some pairs practice each
exchange before going on to
another exchange .


Teacher –Ss


Ss to work in pairs , replacing
the information with the words
in the dictation list


- Listen and Gap fill
Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

e. On the description of Sain Nicholas in frofessor
Moore's poem


<b>* Reporting :</b>


Eg: On Christmas people often decorate a tree and
they send cards to relatives and friends…


<b>* Write it up :</b>
<b>* Consolidation: </b>


<b>- Retell the main points of this lesson.</b>
<b>* Homeworks : </b>



- Learn by heart vocabulary


- Let students do the exercises in the workbook
- Prepare well for the next period


Individual


Some Ss Retell the main points
of this lesson.


Copy down homeworks


Unit 13 : festivals



<i><b>Teaching date 23/ 3 / 2009.</b></i>



<b>Period 82. </b>


<b>Lesson4 : write</b>



<b>A / The aims : </b>



<b>I . Teaching points</b>

: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to

Completing a report
about the rice – cooking festival.Writing a report about a festival they joined recently


Develop Ss’ Writing skill.



<b>II. Teaching aids</b>

: Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.


drawing,mime , picture, gap fill charts.




<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>



<b>I. Organization: -</b>

Greeting and checking attendance .



<b>II. Checking up:</b>



- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>* Brainstorm</b>
- fetching- water
- making- fire
- cooking- rice


- Six people take part in the rice cooking festiaval
- Fire is made in the traditional way….


<b>* Gapfill (write 1)</b>


1. rice-cooking 2. one/a 3. water-fetching
4. run 5. water 6. traditional 7. bamboo
8. six 9. separate 10. added


<b>* Understanding questions : (The answers to the</b>
<b>questions below can help you)</b>


1. What does this report show?


2. Where was it held ?




3. How many competitions were there ?


4. What do each team do in each contest


5. How was the festival ?



1. Name of the festival


2. Where was it held ?


3. How long did it last ?


4. Activities, competitions ?



5. How were the ativities organized ?



6. How many people took part in each activity ?


7. What did you think about the festival ?



<b>* Write : Write the similar report on a festival you</b>
<i>joined recently. </i>


<b>Eg:</b>


<i><b>This report shows how the school festival was</b></i>


<i><b>held</b></i>



<i><b>The festival was held in the schoolyard. There</b></i>


<i><b>were two competitions: volleyball and jug of</b></i>


<i><b>war</b></i>



<i><b>In the volleyball game, the were six students in</b></i>


<i><b>each team and each class had a volleybal</b></i>


<i><b>team. The played against each other and the</b></i>



<i><b>8C team had most points got the grand prize.</b></i>


<i><b>There were ten students who took part in the</b></i>


<i><b>jug of war</b></i>



Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual


Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in chorus.


Individual
Pair work


Ss to work in pairs and give their
answers .


-Work in pairs
Teacher –Ss


Ss to work in pairs ,
Pair work


- Write the report on a festival
Ss to open their books and
complete the notes.


Individual



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

<i><b>Each class had a team and the 9B team won</b></i>


<i><b>all the others got the first prize.</b></i>



<i><b>The school festival was wonderful. it made all</b></i>


<i><b>the students love their school and study better.</b></i>



 <b>Correction: </b>
 <b>Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.


 <b>Homeworks : </b>


- Learn by heart vocabulary


- Let students do the exercises in the workbook
- Prepare well for the next period


Some Ss Retell the main points of
this lesson.


Copy down homeworks


Unit 13 : festivals



<i><b>Teaching date 27 / 3 /2009. </b></i>



<b>Period 83. </b>


<b>Lesson 5: language focus.</b>




<b>A/ The aims: </b>



<b>I.Teaching points :</b>

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using



<b>Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising </b>


<b>compound words and reported statements.</b>



Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 13


- Develop Ss’ four skills.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>

-Text books, lesson plan, posters .



<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>



<b>I. Organization:</b>

- Greeting and checking attendance.



<b>II. Checking up: </b>



-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.


- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .



- Teacher corrects and give them marks.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


* Warm up:


<b>* Net work : Preparations for Tet</b>
<b>Model sentences:</b>



<b>* Passive form</b>

:



Be + Past participle



Matching:


<b>Tenses</b> <b>Form</b>


1. Present simple
2. Past simple
3. Future simple
4. Present perfect


a. Was/were + V.pp
b. Have/has been +
V.pp


c. Is/are/am + V.pp
d. will/shall be + V.pp
<i><b>* Gapfill : </b></i>


<b>* LF1: P.128</b>



a. were performed b. was decorated/ put
c. is made d. will be held
e. was awarded f. was written


<b>* LF2: P.128-129</b>




- To jumble : lén xén, lµm lÉn lén


1. jumbled 2. broken 3. broken
4. scattered 5. pulled


<b>* Compound nouns :</b>


<b>A rice cooking festival</b>



<i>(article)(noun) (V-ing) (noun)</i>
- To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing


<b>* LF 3 : P.130</b>



<i><b>Answer key</b></i>


a. A fire-making contest
b. A bull-fighting festival
c. A car-making industry
d. A flower-arranging contest
e. A rice-exporting country
f. A. clothes-washing machine
<b>* Reported speech :</b>


<i>Model sentences :</i>


He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech
He said he was a plumber -> reported speech


Changes:


1. Tenses:


Direct speech Indirect-reported speech
present simple


will / must / can


past simple


would / had to / could


Whole class
Team work


Teacher – Ss


- Copy down new lesson.
- Work individually


- Look at the books and do
exercises


- Work in pairs


- Some Ss to go to the board to do
exercises.


- Copy down new Grammar.
- Individual



Individual
Pair work


Ss to work in pairs and give their
answers .


some pairs practice each exchange
before going on to another


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

2.Pronouns:


Depend on the Subject of the main clause
3. Advs of time:


This  that / now  then / here  there
today  that day / tomorrow  the next day
Yesterday  the day before / ago  before

<b>* LF 4 : P.130 :</b>

Transformation drill
b. He said he could fix the faucets


c. He said the pipes were broken
d. He said new pipes were expensive
e. He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then


<b>* Consolidation:</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>* Homeworks: </b>


- Redo all exercises



- Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12.
- Prepare for next lesson.


Ss to work in pairs , replacing the
information with the words in the
dictation list .


Pair work


Ss to open their books and do
exercises.


Individual


Some Ss Retell the main points of
this lesson.


Copy down homeworks


<i><b>Teaching date : 30 /03 / 2009.</b></i>


<b>Period 84 . </b>


<b> </b>

<b>REVISION</b>



<b>A/ The aims: </b>



<b>I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using Passive form : </b>
<b>be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising compound words and reported </b>


<b>statements.</b>


Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 13
- Develop Ss’ four skills.


<b>II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .</b>


<b>B/ Steps of the lesson:</b>



<b>I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.</b>


<b>II. Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.</b>
- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .


- Teacher corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’<sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>* GRAMMAR: </b>

<b>* Passive form</b>

:



Be + Past participle



Matching:


<b>Tenses</b> <b>Form</b>


1. Present simple
2. Past simple



a. Was/were + V.pp
b. Have/has been + V.pp


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

3. Future simple
4. Present perfect


c. Is/are/am + V.pp
d. will/shall be + V.pp
<b>* Compound nouns :</b>


<b>A rice cooking festival</b>



<i>(article)(noun) (V-ing) (noun)</i>


- To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing
<b>* Reported speech :</b>


<i>Model sentences :</i>


He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech
He said he was a plumber -> reported speech
<b>Changes:</b>


<b>1. Tenses:</b>


Direct speech Indirect-reported speech
present simple


will / must / can



past simple


would / had to / could
<b>2.Pronouns:</b>


Depend on the Subject of the main clause
3. Advs of time:


This  that / now  then / here  there
today  that day / tomorrow  the next day
Yesterday  the day before / ago  before
Have Ss copy


<b>Read the following passage and choose the item (a, </b>
<b>b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions </b>
<b>about it.</b>


Hi! I’m Dean. I’m from England. My favorite time
of the year is Christmas, which is on 25 December.
That’s when Christians celebrate the birth of Christ. In
the middle of December we send a lot of cards to our
friends and family, here and abroad. Then we get a big
tree and <i><b>decorate</b></i> it with lights and other things. On
Christma Day, we give each other presents. We have
one enormous meal with turkey, and after that, we
have Christmas pudding.


<b>1. When is Christmas held?</b>


a. On 25 December / b. In the middle of December


c. In the middle of the year / d. no information


<b>2.Christmas is held because Christians want to__.</b>
a. have a good time/ b. celebrate the birth of Christ
c. visit their friends and family / d. decorate big trees
<b>3. What does the word ‘</b><i><b>decorate’</b></i><b> in line 5 mean?</b>
a. make something look nicer/ b. paint something
c. make something look worse / d. buy something
<b>4. On Christmas Day, people_____ .</b>


Teacher – Ss


Work with a partner
Pair work


- Ss to read the instructions and
look at the pictures to put them in
the correct order according to
theinstructions


- Ss to rewrite the sentences in the
passive form


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Individual
Whole class


Pair work



Teacher – Ss
Whole class


Ss to read the letter and match the
words


Individual


Ss to give their answers
Read the letter aloud


Ss to read the complete letter
aloud


</div>

<!--links-->

×